Volvo V40 2016 Owners Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Volvo V40 2016 Owners Manual PDF
WEB ED IT ION
OWNER'S MANUAL
VLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the world's saf- est passenger vehicles. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environ- mental requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and maintenance infor- mation contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
01 01 Introduction Owner information is available here.......... 13 Digital owner's manual in the car.............. 14 Support and information about the car on the Internet................................................ 16 Reading the owner's manual.................... 17 Recording data......................................... 20 Accessories and extra equipment............ 21 Volvo ID..................................................... 22 Environmental philosophy......................... 23 The owner's manual and the environ- ment.......................................................... 26 Laminated glass........................................ 26 02
02 Safety General information on seatbelts.............. 28 Seatbelt - putting on................................. 29 Seatbelt - loosening.................................. 30 Seatbelt - pregnancy................................ 30 Seatbelt reminder...................................... 31 Seatbelt tensioner..................................... 31 Safety - warning symbol........................... 32 Airbag system........................................... 33 Airbags on driver's side............................ 34 Passenger airbag...................................... 34 Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat- ing*............................................................ 36 Side airbag (SIPS)..................................... 38 Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion..................................................... 39 Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 39 General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection)................................................. 40 WHIPS - child seats.................................. 41 WHIPS - seating position.......................... 41 When the systems deploy......................... 42 General information on safety mode......... 43 Safety mode - attempting to start the car............................................................. 44 Safety mode - moving the car.................. 45
02 Pedestrian airbag...................................... 45 Pedestrian airbag - moving the car........... 46 Pedestrian airbag - folding up.................. 46 General information on child safety.......... 47 Child seats................................................ 48 Child seats - location................................ 52 Child seat - ISOFIX................................... 53 ISOFIX - size classes................................ 53 ISOFIX - types of child seat...................... 54 Child seats - upper mounting points........ 56
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3
03 03 Instruments and controls Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview........................................... 58 Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car - overview................................... 61 Combined instrument panel...................... 64 Analogue combined instrument panel - overview.................................................... 64 Digital combined instrument panel - overview.................................................... 65 Eco guide & Power guide*........................ 68 Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols...................................... 69 Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols................................... 71 Outside temperature gauge...................... 73 Trip meter.................................................. 74 Clock......................................................... 74 Combined instrument panel - license agreement................................................. 74 Symbols in the display.............................. 75 Volvo Sensus............................................ 78 Key positions............................................ 79 Key positions - functions at different lev- els.............................................................. 79 Seats, front................................................ 81 Seats, front - electrically operated............ 82
03 Seats, rear................................................. 83 Steering wheel.......................................... 85 Light switches........................................... 86 Position lamps.......................................... 88 Daytime running lights.............................. 89 Tunnel detection*...................................... 89 Main/dipped beam.................................... 90 Active main beam*.................................... 90 Active Xenon headlamps*......................... 92 Rear fog lamp........................................... 93 Brake lights............................................... 93 Hazard warning flashers........................... 94 direction indicators................................... 94 Interior lighting.......................................... 95 Home safe light duration........................... 96 Approach light duration............................ 97 Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pat- tern............................................................ 98 Wipers and washers............................... 101 Power windows....................................... 103 Door mirrors............................................ 105 Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating.................................................. 106 Rearview mirror - interior........................ 107
03 Glass roof*.............................................. 107 Compass*............................................... 108 Menu navigation - combined instrument panel....................................................... 109 Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel..................................... 110 Menu overview - digital combined instru- ment panel.............................................. 110 Messages................................................ 110 Messages - handling............................... 111 MY CAR.................................................. 112 Trip computer......................................... 113 Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel..................................... 115 Trip computer - digital combined instru- ment panel.............................................. 119 Trip computer - trip statistics*................ 122
Table of contents
4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 04 Climate control General information on climate control... 124 Actual temperature................................. 125 Sensors - climate control........................ 125 Air quality................................................ 125 Air quality - passenger compartment fil- ter............................................................ 126 Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*..................................................... 126 Air quality - IAQS*................................... 127 Air quality - material................................ 127 Menu settings - climate control.............. 127 Air distribution in the passenger com- partment.................................................. 128 Electronic climate control - ECC*........... 130 Electronic temperature control - ETC..... 131 Heated front seats*................................. 132 Heated rear seat*.................................... 132 Fan.......................................................... 133 Auto-regulation....................................... 133 Temperature control in the passenger compartment.......................................... 134 Air conditioning....................................... 134 Demisting and defrosting the wind- screen..................................................... 135 Air distribution - recirculation.................. 136
04 Air distribution - table............................. 137 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater*..................................... 139 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - direct start................ 140 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - immediate stop......... 141 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - timer.......................... 141 Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - messages................. 142 Additional heater*.................................... 143 Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 143 Electric additional heater*....................... 144 05
05 Loading and storage Storage spaces....................................... 146 Storage compartment drivers side........ 148 Tunnel console........................................ 148 Tunnel console - armrest........................ 148 Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray*................................................... 149 Glovebox................................................. 149 Inlaid mats*............................................. 149 Vanity mirror............................................ 150 Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets............... 150 Loading................................................... 151 Loading - long load................................. 152 Roof load................................................. 152 Load retaining eyelets............................. 153 Loading - bag holder ............................. 153 Loading - folding bag holder*................. 153 12 V socket - cargo area......................... 154 Cargo net................................................ 155 Hat shelf.................................................. 156
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5
06 06 Locks and alarm Remote control key................................. 158 Remote control key - losing ................... 158 Remote control key - personalisation*.... 159 Locking/unlocking - indicator................. 160 Lock indicator......................................... 160 Remote control key - electronic immobi- liser.......................................................... 161 Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system*..................................... 161 Remote control key - functions............... 162 Remote control key - range.................... 163 Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions................................................. 164 Remote control key with PCC* - range... 165 Detachable key blade............................. 165 Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching................................................. 166 Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 166 Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery..................................................... 167 Keyless drive*.......................................... 168 Keyless Drive* - range............................. 168 Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the remote control key.................................. 169
06 Keyless Drive* - interference to remote control key function................................ 169 Keyless Drive* - locking.......................... 170 Keyless Drive* - unlocking...................... 170 Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade....................................................... 171 Keyless Drive* - lock settings................. 171 Keyless Drive* - antenna location........... 172 Locking/unlocking - from the outside .... 172 Manual locking of the door..................... 173 Locking/unlocking - from the inside....... 174 Global opening........................................ 175 Locking/unlocking - glovebox................. 175 Locking/unlocking - tailgate.................... 175 Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap........... 177 Deadlocks*.............................................. 177 Child safety locks - manual activation.... 178 Child safety locks - electrical activation* 179 Alarm....................................................... 180 Alarm indicator........................................ 181 Alarm - automatic re-arming................... 181 Alarm - automatic arming....................... 181 Alarm - remote control key not working. 182 Alarm signals........................................... 182
06 Reduced alarm level............................... 182 Type approval - remote control key sys- tem.......................................................... 183
Table of contents
6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 07 Driver support Electronic stability control (ESC) - gen- eral.......................................................... 185 Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera- tion.......................................................... 186 Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym- bols and messages................................. 187 Road Sign Information (RSI)................... 189 Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 189 Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 191 Speed limiter*.......................................... 191 Speed limiter* - getting started............... 192 Speed limiter* - changing speed............. 193 Speed limiter - temporary deactivation and standby mode*................................. 193 Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee- ded.......................................................... 194 Speed limiter* - deactivation................... 195 Cruise control*........................................ 195 Cruise control* - managing speed.......... 196 Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode.................................. 197 Cruise control* - resume set speed........ 198 Cruise control* - deactivate.................... 199 Adaptive cruise control (ACC)*............... 200 Adaptive cruise control* - function......... 201
07 Adaptive cruise control* - overview........ 203 Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed...................................................... 204 Adaptive cruise control* - set time inter- val............................................................ 205 Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode............ 206 Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle........................................ 207 Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate...... 207 Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assis- tance....................................................... 207 Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality................................ 209 Radar sensor........................................... 210 Radar sensor - limitations....................... 210 Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action............................................... 212 Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages................................................ 213 Distance Warning*.................................. 215 Distance Warning* - limitations............... 216 Distance Warning* - symbols and mes- sages....................................................... 217 City Safety........................................... 218 City Safety - function........................... 218
07 City Safety - operation........................ 219 City Safety - limitations....................... 220 City Safety - laser sensor.................... 222 City Safety - symbols and messages.. 224 Collision warning system*....................... 225 Collision warning system* - function...... 226 Collision warning system* - detection of cyclists.................................................... 227 Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians............................................. 228 Collision warning system* - operation.... 229 Collision warning system* - limitations... 230 Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations.......................................... 231 Collision warning system* - symbols and messages................................................ 233 Driver Alert System*................................ 234 Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 234 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 235 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages................................................ 236 Lane assistance*..................................... 237 Lane Keeping Aid - function................... 237 Lane Keeping Aid - operation................. 239 Lane Keeping Aid - limitations................ 239
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7
07 Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and mes- sages....................................................... 241 Park Assist*............................................. 242 Park assist syst* - function..................... 242 Park assist syst* - backward.................. 244 Park assist syst* - forward...................... 244 Park assist syst* - fault indication........... 245 Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors. 245 Park assist camera.................................. 246 Park assist camera - settings................. 248 Park assist camera - limitations.............. 250 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*........................... 250 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function.......... 251 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation........ 251 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations....... 253 Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and messages................................................ 254 BLIS........................................................ 255 BLIS - operation...................................... 256 CTA*........................................................ 257 BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages 259 Adjustable steering force*....................... 260 Type approval - radar system................. 261
08 08 Starting and driving Alcohol lock*........................................... 265 Alcohol lock* - functions......................... 265 Alcohol lock* - storage............................ 266 Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine 266 Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind................ 267 Alcohol lock* - text messages................ 269 Starting the engine.................................. 269 Switching off the engine......................... 270 Steering lock........................................... 271 Jump starting.......................................... 271 Gearboxes............................................... 272 Manual gearbox...................................... 272 Gear shift indicator*................................ 273 Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*............ 274 Automatic gearbox - Powershift*............ 278 Gear selector inhibitor............................. 280 Hill start assist (HSA)*............................. 281 Start/Stop*.............................................. 281 Start/Stop* - function and operation....... 282 Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop... 283 Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts........ 285 Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start......................................................... 286
08 Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox................................................... 286 Start/Stop* - settings.............................. 287 Start/Stop* - symbols and messages..... 288 Drive mode ECO*.................................... 290 Foot brake............................................... 292 Foot brake - anti-lock braking system.... 293 Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers......... 294 Foot brake - emergency brake assis- tance....................................................... 294 Parking brake.......................................... 294 Driving in water....................................... 295 Overheating............................................. 296 Driving with open tailgate....................... 297 Overload - starter battery........................ 297 Before a long journey.............................. 297 Winter driving.......................................... 298 Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing............. 298 Fuel filler flap - manual opening.............. 299 Filling up with fuel................................... 299 Fuel - handling........................................ 300 Fuel - petrol............................................. 300 Fuel - diesel............................................. 301
Table of contents
8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Catalytic converters................................ 302 Filling with fuel - with a fuel can.............. 303 Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................ 303 Economical driving.................................. 304 Driving with a trailer................................ 305 Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox... 306 Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox 306 Towing bracket....................................... 307 Detachable towbar* - storage................. 307 Detachable towbar* - specifications....... 308 Detachable towbar* - attachment/ removal................................................... 308 Trailer Stability Assist - TSA.................... 311 Towing.................................................... 312 Towing eye.............................................. 313 Recovery................................................. 314 09
09 Wheels and tyres Tyres - maintenance............................... 316 Tyres - direction of rotation.................... 317 Tyres - tread wear indicators.................. 318 Tyres - air pressure................................. 318 Wheel and wheel rim dimensions........... 319 Tyres - dimensions.................................. 319 Tyres - load index................................... 320 Tyres - speed ratings.............................. 320 Wheel nuts.............................................. 321 Winter tyres............................................. 321 Spare wheel*........................................... 322 Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel*..................................................... 323 Changing wheels - removing wheels...... 323 Changing wheels - fitting........................ 325 Warning triangle...................................... 327 Jack*....................................................... 327 First aid kit*............................................. 328 Tyre monitoring (TM)*.............................. 328 Emergency puncture repair*................... 330 Emergency puncture repair kit* - over- view......................................................... 331 Emergency puncture repair* - operation. 332
09 Emergency puncture repair* - recheck- ing........................................................... 334 Inflating tyres with the compressor from the emergency puncture repair kit*......... 335
Table of contents
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 9
10 10 Maintenance and service Volvo service programme....................... 337 Book service and repair*......................... 337 Raising the car........................................ 340 Bonnet - opening and closing................. 342 Engine compartment - overview............. 342 Engine compartment - checking............. 343 Engine oil - general................................. 343 Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 344 Coolant - level......................................... 346 Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 347 Climate control system - fault tracing and repair....................................................... 348 Lamp replacement - general................... 348 Lamp replacement - location of front lamps...................................................... 349 Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 349 Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs................................. 350 Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 350 Lamp replacement - main beam............. 351 Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 351 Lamp replacement - direction indicators front......................................................... 351 Lamp replacement - position lamps, front......................................................... 352
10 Lamp replacement - daytime running lights....................................................... 352 Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps...................................................... 352 Lamp replacement - direction indicators rear, brake lights and reversing lamp..... 353 Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp......... 353 Lamp replacement - vanity mirror light- ing........................................................... 354 Lamps - specifications ........................... 354 Wiper blades........................................... 355 Washer fluid - filling................................ 357 Starter battery - general.......................... 358 Battery - symbols.................................... 360 Starter battery - replacement.................. 360 Battery - Start/Stop................................. 361 Electrical system..................................... 363 Fuses - general....................................... 363 Fuses - in engine compartment.............. 364 Fuses - under glovebox.......................... 367 Fuses - under the right-hand front seat.. 370 Car wash................................................. 372 Polishing and waxing.............................. 373 Water and dirt-repellent coating............. 374 Rustproofing........................................... 375
10 Cleaning the interior................................ 375 Paint damage.......................................... 377
Table of contents
10
11 11 Specifications Type designations................................... 380 Dimensions............................................. 382 Weights................................................... 383 Towing capacity and towball load.......... 384 Engine specifications.............................. 386 Engine oil - adverse driving conditions... 388 Engine oil - grade and volume................ 389 Coolant - grade and volume................... 391 Transmission fluid - grade and volume... 392 Brake fluid - grade and volume............... 393 Fuel tank - volume.................................. 394 Air conditioning, fluid - volume and grade....................................................... 395 Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions... 396 Tyres - approved tyre pressures............. 400 12
12 Alphabetical Index Alphabetical Index.................................. 402
Table of contents
11
INTRODUCTION
01 Introduction
01
13
Owner information is available here The owner's manual is available in the car's screen, as a mobile app, on Volvo's support page. There is a Quick Guide in the glovebox and a supplement to the owner's manual including specifications and fuse information. A complete printed owner's manual can be ordered.
Digital owner's information
In the car's screen A digital1 version of the owner's manual is available in the car's screen. The information is searchable and can also be subdivided into different categories.
Read more in the Digital owner's manual in the car.
As a mobile app A digital owner's manual is also available as a mobile app and can be downloaded from the e.g. App Store. The app contains video as well as options for visual navigation with exte- rior and interior images of the car. It is easy to navigate between the different sections in the owner's manual and the content is searcha- ble. Read more about Owner's Manual in mobile devices.
On the Web The owner's manual can also be accessed from Volvo's support page,
support.volvocars.com, both online and in PDF format. On the support page there are also videos and step-by-step instructions for e.g. Internet-connected services and func- tions. The page is available for most markets. Read more in Support and more information about the car on the Internet.
Printed owner's information
Printed supplement The printed owner's manual in the car is a supplement to the digital owner's manual1
and contains important text, information about fuses as well as specifications. It also contains instructions which may come in handy when it is not possible to read the information in the centre display for practical reasons. See how the owner's manual is structured in Reading the owner's manual.
Quick Guide There is also a Quick Guide available in prin- ted format that helps you to get started with the most commonly used functions in the car.
More owner's information in printed format Depending on equipment level selected, mar- ket, etc. additional owner's information may also be available in printed format in the car. A complete printed owner's manual can be ordered2. Contact a Volvo dealer to order the printed owner's manual or supplements for it.
Changing the language in the car's screen Changing the language in the car's screen may mean that some information does not conform to national or local laws and regula- tions.
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are fol- lowed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the information on the screen and in the prin- ted manual then it is always the printed information that applies.
Related information Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 14)
Support and information about the car on the Internet (p. 16)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 17)
1 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen. 2 This manual is included with the car from the start for markets without owner's manual in the screen.
01 Introduction
01
14
Digital owner's manual in the car The owner's manual can be read on the screen in the car3. The content is searchable and it is easy to navigate between different sections.
Open the digital owner's manual - press the MY CAR button in the centre console, press OK/MENU and select Owner's manual.
For basic navigation, see Operating the sys- tem. See below for a more detailed descrip- tion.
Owner's manual, start page.
There are four options for finding information in the digital owner's manual:
Search - Search function for finding an article.
Categories - All articles sorted into cate- gories.
Favourites - Quick access to favourite- bookmarked articles.
Quick Guide - A selection of articles for common functions.
Select the information symbol in the lower right-hand corner in order to obtain informa- tion about the digital owner's manual.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available while driving.
Search
Searching using the character wheel.
Character list.
Changing the input mode (see following table).
Use the character wheel to enter a search term, e.g. "seatbelt".
1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/MENU to confirm. The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used.
2. Continue with the next letter and so on.
3 Applies to certain car models.
01 Introduction
01
}} 15
3. To change the input mode to numbers or special characters, or to perform a search, turn TUNE to one of the options (see explanation in the following table) in the list for changing the input mode (2), press OK/MENU.
123/AB C
Change between letters and numbers with OK/MENU.
MORE Change to special characters with OK/MENU.
OK Perform the search. Turn TUNE to select a search result article, press OK/MENU to go to the article.
a|A Changes between lowercase and uppercase letters with OK/ MENU.
| | } Changes from the character wheel to the search field. Move the cursor with TUNE. Delete any misspelling with EXIT. To return to the character wheel, press OK/MENU.
Note that the digit and letter buttons on the control panel can be used for editing in the search field.
Enter with the numerical keyboard
Numerical keyboard.
Another way of entering characters is to use the centre console's buttons 0-9, * and #.
When e.g. 9 is pressed, a bar appears with all characters4 under the button, e.g. W, x, y, z and 9. Quick presses on the button move the cursor through these characters.
Stop with the cursor on the desired char- acter in order to select it - the character is shown on the enter line.
Delete/undo using EXIT.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding number key.
Categories The articles in the owner's manual are struc- tured into main categories and subcategories.
The same article can be in several appropri- ate categories in order to be found more easily.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree and press OK/MENU to open a category - selected - or article - selected . Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.
Favourites Located here are the articles that are saved as favourites. To select an article as a favour- ite, see the heading "Navigating in an article" below.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list and press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.
Quick Guide Located here is a selection of articles for get- ting to know the car's most common func- tions. The articles can also be accessed via categories, but are collected here for quick access.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide and press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.
4 The character for each button may vary depending on market/country/language.
|| 01 Introduction
01
16 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Navigating in an article
Home - leads to the start page for the owner's manual.
Favourite - adds/removes an article as a favourite. You can also press the FAV button in the centre console to add/ remove an article as a favourite.
Highlighted link - leads to linked article.
Special texts - if the article contains warnings, important or note texts then an associated symbol is shown here as well as the number of such texts in the article.
Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or scroll in an article. When the screen has scrolled to the start/end of an article the home and favourite options are accessed by scrolling a further step up/down. Press OK/ MENU to activate the selection/highlighted link. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.
Related information Support and information about the car on
the Internet (p. 16)
Support and information about the car on the Internet There is additional information regarding your car on the Volvo Cars website and support page. From the website, it is also possible to navigate through to My Volvo, a personal web page for you and your car.
Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code below to visit the page. The support page is available for most markets.
QR code that leads to the support page.
The information on the support page is searchable and can also be subdivided into different categories. Available here is support for options related to e.g. Internet connected services and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC)*, the navigation system* and apps. Video and step-by-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how the car is connected to the Internet via a mobile phone.
01 Introduction
01
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 17
Downloadable information from the support page
Maps For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, there is the facility to download maps from the support page.
Mobile apps For selected Volvo models from model year 2014 and 2015, the owner's manual is availa- ble in the form of an app. The VOC* app can also be accessed from here.
Owner's manuals from previous model years Owner's manuals from previous model years are available here in PDF format. The Quick Guide and supplement can also be accessed from the support page. Select car model and model year in order to download the publica- tion required.
Contact On the support page there is contact informa- tion for customer support and the nearest Volvo dealer.
My Volvo on the Internet5
From www.volvocars.com it is possible to navigate through to My Volvo Web which is a personal Web page for you and your car.
Create a personal Volvo ID, log in to My Volvo Web and get an overview of service, agree-
ments and warranties, amongst other things. At My Volvo Web there is also information about accessories and software adapted for your car model.
Related information Volvo ID (p. 22)
Reading the owner's manual A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey.
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to become familiar with new functions, get advice on how best to handle the car in differ- ent situations and learn how to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay atten- tion to the safety instructions contained in the owner's manual.
Development work is constantly in progress to improve our product. Modifications may mean that information, descriptions and illus- trations in the owner's manual differ from the equipment in the car. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.
Volvo Car Corporation
5 Applies to certain markets.
|| 01 Introduction
01
18 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
NOTE
The Owner's manual is available for down- load as a mobile application (applies for certain car models and mobile devices), see www.volvocars.com.
The mobile application also includes video and searchable content and easy naviga- tion between different sections.
Options/accessories All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (fac- tory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have
different equipment depending on adapta- tions for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facili- tate the use of features and functions for example.
Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the foot- note refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts In the car there are displays that show menu texts and message texts. In the owner's man- ual the appearance of these texts differs from the normal text. Examples of menu texts and message texts: Media, Sending location.
Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descend- ing degree of importance for the warning/ information.
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger
01 Introduction
01
}} 19
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.
Risk of property damage
G 0 3 1 5 9 2
White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.
Information
G 0 3 1 5 9 3
White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.
Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres- ponding illustration.
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the ser- ies of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a move- ment.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the reciprocal order is of no relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com- ponents are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in con- nection with the illustration that describes the item.
Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Coolant
Engine oil
|| 01 Introduction
01
20
Related information Related information refers to other articles containing closely-associated information.
Images The manual's images are sometimes sche- matic and may deviate from the car's appear- ance depending on equipment level and mar- ket.
To be continued }}This symbol is located furthest down to the right when an article continues on the fol- lowing page.
Continued from previous page ||This symbol is located furthest up to the left when an article continues from the previ- ous page.
Related information The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 26)
Support and information about the car on the Internet (p. 16)
Recording data As part of Volvo's safety and quality assur- ance, certain information about the vehicle's operation, functionality and incidents are recorded in the car.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to register and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short time, usually 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data related to the following in the event of traffic accidents or collision-like situations:
How the various systems in the car worked
Whether the driver and passenger seat- belts were fastened/tensioned
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake pedal
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us better under- stand the circumstances in which traffic acci- dents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records data when a non-trivial collision
situation occurs. The EDR does not record any data during normal driving conditions. Similarly, the system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident or near-miss situation. How- ever, other parties, such as the police, could use the recorded data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information rou- tinely collected after a traffic accident. Spe- cial equipment and access to either the vehi- cle or the EDR is required to be able to inter- pret the registered data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a number of computers designed to con- tinually check and monitor the function of the car. They can record data during normal driv- ing conditions, but in particular register faults affecting the vehicle's operation and function- ality, or upon activation of the vehicle's active driver support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to ena- ble service and maintenance technicians to diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehicle. The registered information is also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by govern- ment authorities. Information registered in the vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehi- cle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the registered infor- mation can be used in aggregate form for research and product development with the
01 Introduction
01
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21
aim of continuously improving the safety and quality of Volvo cars.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri- bed information being disclosed to third par- ties without the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with national legislation and regula- tions, Volvo may be forced to disclose infor- mation of this nature to the police or other authorities who may assert a legal right to access such. Special technical equipment which Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to is required to be able to read and interpret the recorded data. Volvo is responsi- ble that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling complies with applicable legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can nega- tively affect the car's electronic system.
Certain accessories only function when asso- ciated software is installed in the car's com- puter system. Volvo therefore recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories or extra equipment which are connected to or affect the electrical system.
Heat-reflecting windscreen* The windscreen is equipped with a heat- reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such as a transponder, behind a glass surface with heat-reflecting film may affect its function and performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equip- ment, it should be positioned on the part of the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the highlighted area in the illustration).
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
A 65 mm
B 150 mm
C 125 mm
01 Introduction
01
22 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo ID Volvo ID is your personal ID that provides access to various services6.
Examples of services:
My Volvo - Your personal web page for you and your car.
In an Internet-connected car* - Certain functions and services require that you have registered your car to a personal Volvo ID, for example to be able to send a new address from a map service on the Internet directly to the car.
Volvo On Call, VOC* - Volvo ID is used when logging in to the Volvo On Call mobile app.
Advantages of Volvo ID One user name and one password to
access online services, i.e. only one user- name and one password to remember.
When changing the username/password for a service (e.g. VOC) it will also be changed automatically for other services (e.g. My Volvo Web)
Create a Volvo ID To create a Volvo ID you need to enter a per- sonal e-mail address. Then follow the instruc- tions in the e-mail message that is automati- cally sent to the specified address in order to complete the registration. It is possible to cre-
ate a Volvo ID via one of the following serv- ices:
My Volvo - Enter your e-mail address and follow the instructions.
For an Internet-connected car* - Enter your e-mail address in the app that requires Volvo ID and follow the instruc- tions. Alternatively, press the Connect button in the centre console twice and select Apps Settings and follow the instructions.
Volvo On Call, VOC* - Download the lat- est version of the VOC app. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the start page, enter e-mail address and follow the instructions.
Related information Support and information about the car on
the Internet (p. 16)
6 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
01 Introduction
01
}} 23
Environmental philosophy Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on the development of safer and more effi-
cient products and solutions in order to reduce the negative impact on the environ- ment.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars core values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life cycle of the car and takes into account the environmental impact it has, from design to scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new product developed must have less impact on the environment than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has resulted in the development of the more effi- cient and less polluting Drive-E drivelines. The personal environment is also important to Volvo - the air inside a Volvo is, for example,
cleaner than the air outside thanks to the cli- mate control system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent interna- tional environmental standards. All Volvo's manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certi- fied, and this supports a systematic approach to the operation's environmental issues, which leads to continuous improvement with reduced environmental impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means that environmental laws and regulations in force are complied with. Volvo also requires that its partners must also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption Since a large part of a car's total environmen- tal impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consump- tion generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
|| 01 Introduction
01
24 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Contributing to a better environment An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only contributes to a reduced impact on the environment, but also means reduced costs for the owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce fuel consumption and thereby save money and contribute to a better envi- ronment - here is some advice:
Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (50 mph) and below 50 km/h (30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption.
Follow the Service and Warranty Book- let's recommended intervals for service and maintenance of the car.
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regula- tions.
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops and uneven speed contribute to increased fuel consumption.
If the car is equipped with an engine block heater*, use it before starting from cold - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature more quickly, which lowers con- sumption and reduces emissions.
Also remember to always dispose of environ- mentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncer-
tainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Following this advice can save money, the planet's resources are saved, and the car's durability is extended. For more information and further advice, see Eco guide (p. 68), Economical driving (p. 304) and Fuel con- sumption (p. 396).
Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encompasses a clean interior environ- ment as well as highly efficient emission con- trol. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com- partment via the air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as par- ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. If the outside air is conta- minated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise
in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for exam- ple.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a func- tion that allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked with the remote control key.
Interior The material used in the interior of a Volvo is carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details are hand-made, such as the seams of the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is monitored in order not to emit strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consump- tion for your car. In this way you also contrib- ute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which workshop prem- ises shall be designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. The workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environ- mental care.
01 Introduction
01
25
Recycling Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspec- tive, it is also important that the car is recy- cled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/ approved recycling facility.
Related information The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 26)
01 Introduction
01
26 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The owner's manual and the environment The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from Forest Stewardship Council cer- tified forests or other controlled sources.
The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC certified forests or other controlled sources.
Related information Environmental philosophy (p. 23)
Laminated glass
The glass is reinforced which pro- vides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insu- lation in the passenger compart-
ment. The windscreen and other windows* have laminated glass.
SAFETY
02 Safety
02
28
General information on seatbelts Heavy braking can have serious consequen- ces if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all passengers are using their seatbelts during the journey.
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder. The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protec- tion. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a nor- mal seating position.
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas- ten their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder (p. 31).
Remember Do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.
The seatbelt must not be twisted or caught on anything.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts your- self. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
Related information Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)
02 Safety
02
29
Seatbelt - putting on Put on the seatbelt (p. 28) before driving starts.
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on the shoulder.
Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The locking tab at the centre rear seat only fits into the intended seatbelt buckle.
Remember The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Related information Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)
02 Safety
02
30
Seatbelt - loosening Loosen the seatbelt (p. 28) when the car is stationary.
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)
Seatbelt - pregnancy Seatbelt (p. 28) must always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way.
G 0 2 0 9 9 8
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as pos- sible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant dri- vers must adjust the seat (p. 81) and steer- ing wheel (p. 85) such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel).
The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdo- men and steering wheel.
Related information Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)
02 Safety
02
31
Seatbelt reminder Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fas- ten their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder.
The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and in the combined instrument panel (p. 64).
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.
Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts (p. 28) are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the combined instru- ment panel when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message is acknowledged
automatically after approximately 30 seconds driving or after pressing the indicator stalk OK button (p. 109). If any- one is unbelted then the message can only be acknowledged manually by pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message in the combined instrument panel along with the audio/visual signal. The warning stops when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by pressing the OK button.
The combined instrument panel's information display shows which seatbelts are in use. This information is always available.
Seatbelt tensioner Seatbelts (p. 28) on the driver's side, the pas- senger side and at the outer rear seats are fit- ted with seatbelt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seat- belt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.
Related information General information on seatbelts (p. 28)
02 Safety
02
32
Safety - warning symbol The warning symbol is shown if a fault is detected during fault tracing or if a system has been activated. Where required, the warning symbol is shown together with a message in the combined instrument panel (p. 64) information display.
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- bag system (p. 33) in the analogue combined instrument panel.
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the air- bag system in the digital combined instrument panel.
The warning symbol in the combined instru- ment panel is switched on with the remote control key in key position II (p. 79), fault tracing is performed each time the ignition is switched on. The symbol clears after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag sys- tem is fault-free.
The warning symbol is shown if a fault is detected during fault tracing or if a system has been activated. Where required, the warning symbol is shown together with a message in the display. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS airbag Service required or SRS airbag Service urgent appears in the dis- play. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag sys- tem remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag sys- tem does not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the airbag sys- tem, the belt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault in the sys- tem. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immedi- ately.
Related information General information on safety mode
(p. 43)
02 Safety
02
33
Airbag system In the event of a frontal collision the airbag system helps to protect the head, face and chest of the driver and passenger.
G 0 1 8 6 6 5
Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand- drive car.
G 0 1 8 6 6 6
Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand- drive car.
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelt is fastened. Applies to all seatbelt positions apart from centre seat rear.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.
Related information Airbags on driver's side (p. 34)
Passenger airbag (p. 34)
Safety - warning symbol (p. 32)
02 Safety
02
34
Airbags on driver's side To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 28) on the driver side, the car is equipped with two airbags (p. 33).
One of the airbags is folded up into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
Knee airbag on the driver's side in a left-hand- drive car.
The second airbag (at knee level) is fitted in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver's side; this panel is labelled AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbags in the event of a collision.
Related information Passenger airbag (p. 34)
Passenger airbag To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 28) on the passenger side, the car is equipped with an airbag (p. 33).
The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- hand drive car.
02 Safety
02
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 35
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- hand drive car.
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat protected by an activated airbag. Fail- ure to follow this advice can lead to death or serious injury to the child.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
Switch - PACOS* The front passenger airbag can be deacti- vated (p. 36) if the car is equipped with a
|| 02 Safety
02
36 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passen- ger airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag will always be activated.
Related information Airbags on driver's side (p. 34)
Child seats (p. 48)
Passenger airbag - activating/ deactivating* Front passenger airbag (p. 34) can be deacti- vated if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
Switch - PACOS The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instru- ment panel and is accessible when the pas- senger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required posi- tion. The remote control key's key blade (p. 166) should be used to change position.
Location of airbag switch.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, persons taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller than 140 cm.
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the air- bag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key position II (p. 79) the warning symbol (p. 32) for the airbag is shown in the com- bined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds.
Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag.
02 Safety
02
37
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.
A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preced- ing illustration).
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
A text message and a symbol in the roof con- sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas- senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the message in the roof con- sole indicates that the airbag is deacti- vated, and if the warning symbol (p. 32) for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the lives of passengers in the car.
Related information Child seats (p. 48)
02 Safety
02
38
Side airbag (SIPS) In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- er's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main components, side airbag and sensors. The side airbags are located in the front seat's backrests.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information Airbags on driver's side (p. 34)
Passenger airbag (p. 34)
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion (p. 39)
Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 39)
02 Safety
02
39
Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 38).
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 48) can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated airbag (p. 36) on the front passenger side.
Related information Passenger airbag (p. 34)
General information on child safety (p. 47)
Inflatable Curtain (IC) The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a colli- sion.
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part of the SIPS system (p. 38). It is fitted along the headlining on both sides and helps protect the driver and passengers in the car's outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side pan- els. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the windows in the doors. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is con- cealed in the headlining, may be compro- mised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Related information General information on seatbelts (p. 28)
Airbag system (p. 33)
Side airbag (SIPS) (p. 38)
02 Safety
02
40
General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection) WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro- tection against whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints in the front seats.
The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the collision, and the nature of the colliding vehi- cle all have an influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Seat properties When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work- shop.
Related information WHIPS - child seats (p. 41)
WHIPS - seating position (p. 41)
General information on seatbelts (p. 28)
02 Safety
02
}} 41
WHIPS - child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system (p. 40).
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 48) can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated airbag (p. 36) on the front passenger side.
Related information General information on child safety
(p. 47)
WHIPS - seating position In order to obtain optimum protection from the WHIPS system (p. 40) the driver and pas- senger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed.
Seating position Set the correct seating position in the front seat (p. 81) before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.
Function
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS sys- tem.
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.
02 Safety
02
42
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seat appears to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear- end collision.
When the systems deploy In the event of a collision Volvo's different personal safety systems work together in order to minimise injury.
System Triggered
Seatbelt ten- sioner (p. 31) front seat
In the event of a frontal collision, and/or side-impact collision, and/or rear-end collision and/or overturning
Seatbelt ten- sioner (p. 31) rear seatA
In a frontal colli- sion and/or side- impact accident and/or overturning
Airbags
(Steering wheel, knee (p. 34) and pas- senger airbag (p. 34))
In a frontal colli- sionB
Side airbags (SIPS) (p. 38)
In a side-impact accidentB
System Triggered
Inflatable Curtain IC (p. 39)
In the event of a side impact and/or overturning and/or some frontal colli- sionsB
Whiplash protection WHIPS (p. 40)
In a rear-end colli- sion
A There is no seatbelt tensioner at the centre rear seat. B The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a
collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags (p. 33) have deployed, the fol- lowing is recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an author- ised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are deployed only once during a collision.
02 Safety
02
}} 43
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the air- bags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it con- veyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irrita- tion/injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
General information on safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is trig- gered when a collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety sys- tems, or the brake system.
Warning triangle in the analogue combined instrument panel.
Warning triangle in the digital combined instru- ment panel.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear in the combined instrument panel (p. 64) informa- tion display. This means that the car has reduced functionality.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in per- sonal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.
|| 02 Safety
02
44
Related information Safety mode - attempting to start the car
(p. 44)
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 45)
Safety mode - attempting to start the car If the car is set in safety mode (p. 43) then an attempt to start the car can be made if every- thing seems normal and the absence of fuel leakage has been checked.
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the driver's door. If a message is now shown to the effect that the ignition is on, press the start button. Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key. The car's electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car.
If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display, then the car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery service (p. 314) must be used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden dam- age may make the car impossible to control once moving.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is displayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo work- shop.
Related information Safety mode - moving the car (p. 45)
02 Safety
02
}} 45
Safety mode - moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset after attempting to start the car (p. 44) , the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
Related information General information on safety mode
(p. 43)
Pedestrian airbag The airbag for pedestrians (Pedestrian Airbag) contributes in certain frontal collisions to alle- viating the collision of the pedestrian with the car.
The pedestrian airbag (Pedestrian Airbag) is fitted under the bonnet near the windscreen. In the event of certain frontal collisions with a pedestrian, the sensors in the front bumper react and the airbag inflates if required, based on the force of the impact. The sensors are active at a speed of approx. 20-50 km/h (12-30 mph) and an ambient temperature between -20 and +70C.
The sensors are designed to detect a collision with an object that has similar properties to those of the human leg.
NOTE
There may be objects in the traffic environ- ment that prompt a signal to the sensors that is similar to a collision with a pedes- trian. It is possible that the system will be activated in the event of a collision with such an object.
If the airbag is activated (Pedestrian Airbag)
the rear part of the bonnet is raised and locked in this position
the hazard warning flashers are activated
the brake system is prepared for the upcoming emergency braking.
WARNING
Do not fit any accessories or change any- thing in the front. Incorrect intervention at the front may cause incorrect function in the system and lead to serious injury and damage to the car.
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms are used and that you only use genu- ine parts for them.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an author- ised Volvo workshop in the event of dam- age to the bumper in order to ensure that the system is intact.
|| 02 Safety
02
46
Related information Pedestrian airbag - moving the car
(p. 46)
Pedestrian airbag - folding up (p. 46)
Pedestrian airbag - moving the car The car may be moved if it has not been set in safety mode (p. 43).
If any of the other airbags in the passenger compartment were activated then the car remains in safety mode.
If only the pedestrian airbag (p. 45) (Pedestrian Airbag) has been activated:
1. Move the car to a safe location as close as possible.
2. Fold up the airbag in accordance with the instructions (p. 46).
3. Seek the nearest workshop.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that, after activation of the airbag, you contact an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
Related information Pedestrian airbag (p. 45)
Pedestrian airbag - folding up Pedestrian airbag (p. 45) (Pedestrian Airbag) must be folded up before the car is moved.
Airbag
Airbag housing
Velcro strap, right-hand side
Velcro strap, left-hand side
The airbag may feel warm and give off smoke. This is normal. Fold the airbag as fol- lows:
1. Find the Velcro strap on the left-hand side (4).
2. Gather the airbag fabric along its length on the left-hand side. Then fold the gath- ered fabric towards the centre. Wind the Velcro strap (double sided) around as much fabric as possible and fasten it.
02 Safety
02
47
3. Press the rolled up portion of the airbag into the airbag housing (2).
4. Repeat points 1-3 for the right-hand side. It may be necessary to fold the gathered fabric twice on this side in order to wind the Velcro strap around it.
5. The airbag housing cover will be open slightly. This is completely normal.
Related information Pedestrian airbag - moving the car (p. 46)
General information on child safety Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-facing child seats until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then front-facing booster cushions/child seats until up to 10 years of age.
The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size; see Child seats (p. 48).
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for your particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment pro- vides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Child safety locks The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked (p. 178) from open- ing from the inside.
Related information Child seats (p. 48)
Child seats - location (p. 52)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 56)
02 Safety
02
48
Child seats Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is being used correctly.
G 0 2 0 7 3 9
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included.
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs or the rails and beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.
02 Safety
02
}} 49
Recommended child seats1
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(L)
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
max 13 kg
Child seats which are universally approved.A
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
1 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
|| 02 Safety
02
50
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 1
9-18 kg
Child seats which are universally approved.A
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
02 Safety
02
51
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
A Only for rear-facing child seat. Set the seat's backrest in upright position.
Related information Child seats - location (p. 52)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 56)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)
General information on child safety (p. 47)
02 Safety
02
52
Child seats - location Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 48) in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is acti- vated (p. 36). If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer seri- ous injury if the airbag deploys.
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.
You may place:
a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat provided there is no acti- vated airbag on the front passenger side.
one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat protected by an activated airbag. Fail- ure to follow this advice can lead to death or serious injury to the child.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening but- ton must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.
Related information General information on child safety (p. 47)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 56)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)
02 Safety
02
53
Child seat - ISOFIX ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats (p. 48) that is based on an international stand- ard.
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are located at the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indi- cated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see preceding illustration).
Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.
Related information ISOFIX - size classes (p. 53)
ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 54)
General information on child safety (p. 47)
ISOFIX - size classes There is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX (p. 53) fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct type of child seat (p. 54).
Size class
Description
A Full size, front-facing child seat
B Reduced size (alt. 1), front- facing child seat
B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-fac- ing child seat
C Full size, rear-facing child seat
D Reduced size, rear-facing child seat
E Rear-facing infant seat
F Transverse infant seat, left- hand
G Transverse infant seat, right- hand
WARNING
Never place the child in the passenger seat if the car is fitted with an activated air- bag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- cation, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommenda- tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
Related information ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 54)
02 Safety
02
54
ISOFIX - types of child seat Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car mod- els.
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X
G X X
Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK
(IL)
D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK
(IL)
C X OK
(IL)
02 Safety
02
55
Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIXA installation of child seats
Front seat Outer rear seat
Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKB
(IUF)
B1 X OKB
(IUF)
A X OKB
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for a particular car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard. B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Make sure you select the right size class (p. 53) of child seat with ISOFIX fixture sys- tem.
Related information Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)
02 Safety
02
56
Child seats - upper mounting points The car is equipped with upper mounting points for certain front-facing child seats (p. 48). These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat.
Upper mounting points
The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facili- tate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats.
NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the lug- gage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.
For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc- tions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the attachment point.
Related information General information on child safety (p. 47)
Child seats - location (p. 52)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 53)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
03 Instruments and controls
03
58
Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} 59
Overview, left-hand drive cars
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function See
Menus and mes- sages, direction indicators, main/ dipped beam, trip computer
(p. 109), (p. 111), (p. 94), (p. 90) and (p. 113).
Manual gear changing in an automatic gear- box*
(p. 274).
Cruise control* (p. 195) and (p. 200).
Horn, airbags (p. 85) and (p. 33).
Combined instru- ment panel
(p. 64).
Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*
(p. 112) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
START/STOP ENGINE button
(p. 269).
Ignition switch (p. 79).
Screen for infotain- ment and display of menus
(p. 112) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Function See
Door handle
Control panel (p. 174), (p. 179), (p. 103) and (p. 105).
Hazard warning flashers
(p. 94).
Control panel for infotainment sys- tem and menu nav- igation
(p. 112) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Control panel for climate control
(p. 130) or (p. 131).
Gear selector (p. 272), (p. 274) or (p. 278).
Parking brake (p. 294).
Wipers and wash- ing
(p. 101).
Steering wheel adjustment
(p. 85).
Bonnet opener (p. 342).
Function See
Light switch, opener for tailgate
(p. 86) and (p. 175).
Seat adjustment* (p. 82).
Related information Outside temperature gauge (p. 73)
Trip meter (p. 74)
Clock (p. 74)
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} 61
Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
62
Overview, right-hand drive cars
03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63
Function See
Wipers and wash- ing
(p. 101).
Manual gear changing in an automatic gear- box*
(p. 274).
Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*
(p. 112) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Horn, airbags (p. 85) and (p. 33).
Combined instru- ment panel
(p. 64).
Cruise control* (p. 195) and (p. 200).
START/STOP ENGINE button
(p. 269).
Ignition switch (p. 79).
Screen for infotain- ment and display of menus
(p. 112) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Door handle
Function See
Control panel (p. 174), (p. 179), (p. 103) and (p. 105).
Bonnet opener (p. 342).
Hazard warning flashers
(p. 94).
Control panel for infotainment sys- tem and menu nav- igation
(p. 112) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Control panel for climate control
(p. 130) or (p. 131).
Gear selector (p. 272), (p. 274) or (p. 278).
Parking brake (p. 294).
Menus and mes- sages, direction indicators, main/ dipped beam, trip computer
(p. 109), (p. 111), (p. 94), (p. 90) and (p. 113).
Steering wheel adjustment
(p. 85).
Function See
Light switch, opener for tailgate
(p. 86) and (p. 175).
Seat adjustment* (p. 82).
Related information Outside temperature gauge (p. 73)
Trip meter (p. 74)
Clock (p. 74)
03 Instruments and controls
03
64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Combined instrument panel The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 64)
Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 65)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 69)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 71)
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.
Information display
Information display, analogue instrument panel.
There are further descriptions under the func- tions that use the display.
Gauges and indicators
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking1, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 113) and Filling up with fuel (p. 299).
Eco meter The meter provides an indica- tion of how economically the car is being driven. The higher the reading on the scale, the more economically the car is driven.
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator2 / Gear position indi- cator3. See also Gear shift indicator*
1 When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red. 2 Manual gearbox. 3 Automatic gearbox.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65
(p. 273), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274) or Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 278).
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instru- ment panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols4
Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information dis- play, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the function- ality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emis- sions system and the symbol for low oil pres- sure.
Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 64)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 69)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 71)
Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 65)
Digital combined instrument panel - overview The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.
Information display
Information display, digital instrument panel*.
There are further descriptions under the func- tions that use the display.
Gauges and indicators Various themes can be selected for the digital combined instrument panel. Possible themes are "Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance".
A theme can only be selected when the engine is running.
4 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 343).
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk switch's OK button and select the Themes menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the lever. Press the OK button. Turn the thumbwheel to select the theme and confirm the selection by pressing the OK button.
On certain model variants, the appearance of the centre console's screen follows the theme selected for the combined instrument panel.
The contrast mode and colour mode for the instrument can also be set using the left-hand stalk switch.
For more information on menu navigation, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 109).
The choice of theme and setting of contrast mode and colour mode can be stored for each remote control key in the car key mem- ory*, see Remote control key - personalisa- tion* (p. 159).
Theme "Elegance"
Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 113) and Filling up with fuel (p. 299).
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indi- cator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 273), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*
(p. 274) or Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 278).
5 When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red. 6 Manual gearbox. 7 Automatic gearbox.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67
Theme "Eco"
Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 113) and Filling up with fuel (p. 299).
Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 68).
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indi- cator7. See also Gear shift indicator*
(p. 273), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274) or Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 278).
Theme "Performance"
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indi- cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 113) and Filling up with fuel (p. 299).
Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Power guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 68).
Gear shift indicator6 / Gear position indi- cator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 273), Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274) or Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 278).
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols8
5 When the display's message Distance to empty fuel tank: starts to show ----, the marking becomes red. 6 Manual gearbox. 7 Automatic gearbox. 8 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For
more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 343).
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information dis- play, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the function- ality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emis- sions system and the symbol for low oil pres- sure.
Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 64)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 69)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 71)
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 64)
Eco guide & Power guide* Eco guide and Power guide are two com- bined instrument panel (p. 64) instruments which help the driver to drive the car with optimum driving economy.
The car also stores statistics of journeys made, which can be viewed in the form of a block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statis- tics* (p. 122).
Eco guide This instrument provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; see Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 65).
Instantaneous value
Average value
Instantaneous value The instantaneous value is shown here - the higher the reading on the scale, the better.
The instantaneous value is calculated based on speed, engine speed, engine power uti- lised plus use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h (30-50 mph)) and low engine speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall during acceleration and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red zone on the meter (with a short delay), which means poor driving economy and hence should be avoided.
Average value The average value slowly follows the instanta- neous value and describes how the car has been driven most recently. The higher the pointers on the scale, the better the economy achieved by the driver.
Power guide This instrument shows the relationship between how much power (Power) is being taken from the engine and how much power is available.
To view this function, select the theme "Performance"; see Digital combined instru- ment panel - overview (p. 65).
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69
Available engine power
Engine power utilised
Available engine power The smaller, upper pointer shows the availa- ble engine power9. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is available in the current gear.
Engine power utilised The larger, lower pointer shows the engine power utilised9. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is being taken from the engine.
A large gap between the two pointers indi- cates a large power reserve.
Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that the system is oper- ating, or that an error or failure has occurred.
Indicator symbols
Symbol Specification
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - general (p. 185)
Stability system, sport mode, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation (p. 186)
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Symbol Specification
Information, read display text
Main beam On
Left-hand direction indicator
Right-hand direction indicator
Eco- function on, see Drive mode ECO* (p. 290)
Start/Stop, the engine auto- stopped; see Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 282)
Tyre pressure system , see Tyre monitoring (TM)* (p. 328)
ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a work- shop for checking. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
9 Power is dependent on engine speed.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
70
ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS func- tion.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on. There is only one rear fog lamp - it is located on the driver's side.
Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system.
Stability system, sport mode Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel move- ments and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the
car. The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is activated.
Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol illuminates during engine pre- heating. Preheating mostly takes place due to low temperature.
Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the informa- tion display. The message text is cleared with the OK button, see Menu navigation - com- bined instrument panel (p. 109), or it disap- pears automatically after a time (time depending on which function is indicated). The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the OK button, or disappear automatically after a time.
Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash.
Left/right-hand direction indicator Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.
Eco function on This symbol illuminates when the Eco func- tion is activated.
Start/Stop The symbol shines when the engine is auto- stopped.
Tyre pressure system The symbol illuminates in the event of low tyre pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre pressure system.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71
Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door that is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph)
then the information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph)
then the warning symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet10 is not closed properly then the warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi- ble and close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the information symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information dis- play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.
Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 64)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 71)
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 64)
Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 65)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated, or that a seri- ous error or a serious failure has occurred.
Warning symbols
Symbol Specification
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake applied, digital instrument panel
Parking brake applied, ana- logue instrument panel
Airbags SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Warning
A Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 343).
10 Only cars with alarm*.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
72
Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi- nates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work- shop.
Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. The sym- bol is illuminated during application. For more information, see Parking brake (p. 294).
Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illumi- nates while driving, it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop to have the system checked. Volvo recom- mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reser- voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 347).
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.
If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reser- voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 347). If the brake fluid level is nor- mal but the symbols are still illumi- nated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investiga- ted by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73
Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display at the same time. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the OK button; see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 109). The warning sym- bol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car further.
2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accord- ance with the message in the display. Clear the message using the OK button.
Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door that is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph)
then the information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph)
then the warning symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet11 is not closed properly then the warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possi- ble and close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the information symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information dis- play. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.
Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 64)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 69)
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 64)
Digital combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 65)
Outside temperature gauge The display for the outside temperature gauge appears in the combined instrument panel.
Display for outside temperature gauge, digital instrument panel
Display for outside temperature gauge, analogue instrument panel
When the temperature lies between +2 C to -5 C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has been stationary, the gauge may display a reading that is too high.
Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 64)
11 Only cars with alarm*.
03 Instruments and controls
03
74
Trip meter The trip meter display appears in the com- bined instrument panel.
Trip meter, digital instrument.
Display for trip meter12
The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for measuring short distances. The distance is shown in the display.
Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show the required meter.
A long press (until the change occurs) on the left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets the trip meter shown. For more information, see Trip computer (p. 113).
Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 64)
Clock The clock display appears in the combined instrument panel.
Clock, digital instrument panel.
Display for showing the time13
Set the clock The clock can be adjusted in the menu sys- tem MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 64)
Combined instrument panel - license agreement A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following text is Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/developer.
Combined Instrument Panel Software Open Source Software Notice
This product uses certain free / open source and other software originating from third parties, that is subject to the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2 (LGPLv2), The FreeType Project License ("FreeType License") and other different and/or additional copy right licenses, disclaimers and notices. The links to access the exact terms of LGPLv2, and the other open source software licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and notices are provided to you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the relevant License, regarding your rights under said licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers to provide the source code of said free/open source software to you for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling, upon written request. Please contact your nearest Volvo Dealer.
12 Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant. 13 The time is shown in the middle of the instrument panel when an analogue instrument panel is fitted.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} 75
The offer is valid for a period of at least three (3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers spare parts or customer support.
Portions of this product uses software copyrighted 2007 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
Portions of this product uses software with Copyright 19942013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio (http://www.lua.org/)
This product includes software under following licenses:
LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old- licenses/lgpl-2.1.html
GNU FriBidi
DevIL
The FreeType Project License: http:// git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/ freetype2.git/tree/docs/FTL.TXT
FreeType 2
MIT License: http://opensource.org/licenses/ mit-license.html
Lua
Symbols in the display There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information sym- bols.
Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found.
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the informa- tion display in the combined instrument panel at the same time.
- When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information sym- bol illuminates, and a text appears on the information display in the combined instru- ment panel. The yellow information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
Warning symbols in the combined instrument panel
Symbol Specification See
Low oil pressure (p. 71)
Parking brake applied, digital instrument panel
(p. 71), (p. 294)
Parking brake applied, analogue instrument panel
(p. 71)
Airbags SRS (p. 32), (p. 71)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 28), (p. 71)
Alternator not charging
(p. 71)
Fault in brake system
(p. 71), (p. 292)
Warning, safety mode
(p. 32), (p. 43), (p. 71)
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Control symbols in the combined instrument panel
Symbol Specification See
ABL fault* (p. 69), (p. 92)
Emissions sys- tem
(p. 69)
ABS fault (p. 69), (p. 292)
Rear fog lamp on
(p. 69), (p. 93)
Stability system, ESC (Electronic Stability Con- trol), Trailer sta- bility assist*
(p. 69), (p. 187), (p. 311)
Stability system, sport mode
(p. 69), (p. 187)
Engine pre- heater (diesel)
(p. 69)
Low level in fuel tank
(p. 69), (p. 142)
Information, read display text
(p. 69)
Main beam On (p. 69), (p. 90)
Symbol Specification See
Left-hand direc- tion indicators
(p. 69)
Right-hand direction indica- tors
(p. 69)
Start/Stop*, engine auto- stopped
(p. 69), (p. 282)
ECO function* on
(p. 69), (p. 290)
Tyre pressure system*
(p. 69), Tyre monitoring (TM)* (p. 328)
Information symbols in the combined instrument panel
Symbol Specification See
Main beam with auto dimming - AHB*
(p. 90)
Camera sensor*, Laser sensor*
(p. 90), (p. 224), (p. 233), (p. 236), (p. 241)
Symbol Specification See
Adaptive cruise control*
(p. 213)
Adaptive cruise control*
(p. 204), (p. 213)
Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Warning* (Dis- tance Alert)
(p. 213), (p. 215)
Adaptive cruise control*
(p. 203)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
Speed limiter (p. 191)
Radar sensor* (p. 213), (p. 217), (p. 233)
Start/Stop* (p. 288)
Start/Stop* (p. 288)
Start/Stop* (p. 288)
03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77
Symbol Specification See
Distance warning* (Distance Alert), City SafetyTM, Collision warning system*, Auto- brake*
(p. 217), (p. 224), (p. 233)
Engine block and passenger com- partment heater*
(p. 142)
Engine block heater and pas- senger compart- ment heater* Service required
(p. 142)
Activated timer* (p. 142)
Activated timer* (p. 142)
ABL system* (p. 92)
Low battery (p. 142)
Symbol Specification See
Park Assist Pilot - PAP*
(p. 250)
Rain sensor* (p. 101)
Lane assistance* (p. 239)
Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Lane assis- tance*
(p. 241)
Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Lane assis- tance*
(p. 236), (p. 241)
Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Time for a break
(p. 235)
Driver Alert Sys- tem*, Time for a break
(p. 236)
Gear shift indica- tor
(p. 273)
Gear positions (p. 274)
Symbol Specification See
Recorded speed information*
(p. 189)
Measuring the oil level
(p. 344)
Information symbols in the roof console display
Symbol Specification See
Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)
Airbag, passenger seat, activated
(p. 36)
Airbag, passenger seat, deactivated
(p. 36)
Related information Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 69)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 71)
Messages - handling (p. 111)
03 Instruments and controls
03
78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo Sensus Volvo Sensus is the heart of the personal Volvo experience and connects you with the car and outside world. Sensus provides infor- mation, entertainment and assistance when it is needed. Sensus consists of intuitive func- tions that both enhance the car journey and simplifies ownership of the car.
An intuitive navigation structure makes it pos- sible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, with- out distracting the driver.
Sensus covers all the car's solutions that enable connection* to the outside world and provides you with intuitive control over all the car's capabilities.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many functions in several of the car's systems on the centre console's display screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by means of an intuitive user interface. Settings
can be made in Car settings, Audio and media, Climate control, etc.
With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made.
With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are pre- sented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.
With a press on the respective function RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, *, NAV* and CAM14
other sources, systems and functions can be activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth*, navigation* and park assist cam- era*.
For more information about all functions/ systems, see the relevant section in the owner's manual or its supplement.
Overview
Control panel in centre console. The figure is schematic - the number of functions and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the equipment selected and the market.
Navigation* - NAV, see separate supple- ment (Sensus Navigation).
Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, see separate supplement (Sensus Info- tainment).
Internet-connected car - *, see sepa- rate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Climate control system (p. 124).
Function settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
14 Applies to certain car models.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79
Key positions The remote control key can be used to set the vehicle's electrical system in different modes/ levels so that different functions are available; see Key positions - functions at different lev- els (p. 79).
Ignition switch with remote control key extrac- ted/inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the keyless start and lock system* function the key does not need to be inserted into the ignition switch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket. For more infor- mation on the keyless start and lock sys- tem, see Keyless drive* (p. 168).
Insert the key 1. Hold the end of the remote control key
with the detachable key blade and insert the key in the ignition switch.
2. Then press the key in the lock up to its end position.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can impair the function or destroy the lock.
Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade; see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 166).
Withdraw the key Grip the remote control key and pull it out from the ignition switch.
Key positions - functions at different levels To enable the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in 3 differ- ent levels - 0, I and II - with the remote con- trol key. This owner's manual describes these levels throughout using the denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions avail- able in each key position/level.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Level Functions
0 Odometer, clock and tem- perature gauge are illumi- nated.
Electrically operated seats can be adjusted.
The audio system can be used for a limited time - see the Sensus Infotainment sup- plement.
I Sun visor for glass roof, power windows, 12 V socket in the passenger compart- ment, RTI, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.
II The headlamps come on.
Warning/indicator lamps illu- minate for 5 seconds.
Several other systems are activated. However, electric heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after starting the engine.
This key position consumes a lot of current from the starter battery and should therefore be avoided!
Selecting key position/level Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This
means that the car's electrical system is at level 0.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake/clutch pedal when these key positions are due to be selected.
Key position I - With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch15
- Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.
Key position II - With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch15
- Give a long16 press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Back to key position 0 - To return to key position 0 from position II and I - Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Audio system For information on audio system functions with remote control key removed, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Starting and stopping the engine For information about starting/switching off the engine, see Starting the engine (p. 269).
Towing For important information about the remote control key during towing, see Towing (p. 312).
Related information Key positions (p. 79)
15 Not required for cars with keyless start and lock system*. 16 Approx. 2 seconds.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81
Seats, front The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort.
To adjust lumbar support*, turn the wheel17.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after adjusting position.
To raise/lower the front edge of seat cushion*, pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat*, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*, see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 82).
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked posi- tion in order to avoid personal injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident.
Adjusting the front seat head restraints
The height of the head restraints can be adjusted.
Adjust the head restraint based on the per- son's height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible.
To adjust the height, the button (see illustra- tion) must be pressed while the restraint is moved up or down.
The head restraint can be adjusted in three different positions.
Lowering the passenger seat backrest*
The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possi- ble.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Lift the catches on the rear of the back- rest and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Do not use the seat behind the passenger seat, or the rear centre seat, when the passenger seat's backrest is lowered.
17 Also applies to electrically operated seat.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
Related information Seats, front - electrically operated
(p. 82)
Seats, rear (p. 83)
Seats, front - electrically operated The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forward/backward and up/down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest angle can be changed.
Electrically operated seat*
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Raise/lower seat
Seat, forward/backward
Backrest rake
The power seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this should happen, set the car's electrical system in key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.
Preparations The seat can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con- trol key without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjustment is normally made in key position I and can always be made when the engine is running.
Seat with memory function*
The memory function stores settings for the seat and the door mirrors.
Store setting Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
2. Press and hold button M while pressing button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously. Hold the buttons depressed until the acoustic sig- nal is heard and the text is shown the combined instrument panel.
The seat must be adjusted again before a new memory can be set.
Using a stored setting Press one of the memory buttons 1-3 until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If the button is released, the movement of the seat and door mirrors will be interrupted.
Key memory* in remote control key All remote control keys can be used by differ- ent drivers to store the settings for the driv- er's seat and door mirrors18, see Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 159).
Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Make sure that none of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger of becoming trap- ped.
Heated seats For heated seats, see Heated front seats* (p. 132) and Heated rear seat* (p. 132).
Related information Seats, front (p. 81)
Seats, rear (p. 83)
Seats, rear The rear seat backrest and the outer seat head restraints can be folded. The centre seat head restraint can be adjusted to suit the height of the passenger.
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Adjust the head restraint according to pas- senger height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button (see illustration) must be pressed while the restraint is carefully moved down.
The head restraint can be adjusted in five dif- ferent positions.
18 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
84
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the centre seat is not used. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the whole of the back of the head if possible.
Manual lowering of the outer head restraints, rear seat
Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked posi- tion after being folded up.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
When the backrest is to be folded, the rear seat cup holder must not be open and there must be no objects in the rear seat. Nor may the seat belts be connected. Oth- erwise there is a risk of damage to the rear seat upholstery.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be fully folded forward.
Both sections can be folded separately.
If the entire backrest is to be folded then the different sections should be folded separately.
If the right-hand section is being lowered - release and adjust head restraint for the centre seat, see the earlier section "Head restraint, centre seat, rear".
The outer head restraints are lowered automatically when the backrests are lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking handle while folding the backrest for- ward at the same time. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the back- rest is no longer locked in place.
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered the head restraints must be moved for- ward slightly so as not to make contact with the seat cushion.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked prop- erly after being folded up.
Related information Seats, front (p. 81)
Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 82)
Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted in differ- ent positions and has controls for horn and cruise control, as well as menu, audio and phone control.
Adjusting
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth:
1. Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away.
With speed related power steering* the level of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjust- able steering force* (p. 260).
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keypads* and paddles*
Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel.
Cruise control* (p. 195)* and Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)*.
Paddle for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox, see Automatic gear- box - Geartronic* (p. 274).
Audio and phone control, see supple- ment, Sensus Infotainment.
Horn
Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to sig- nal.
Light switches The headlamp control activates and adjusts the external lighting. It is also used to adjust display and instrument lighting and ambience lights (p. 95).
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting as well as ambience lights*
Button for rear fog lamp
Knob for lighting while driving and park- ing
Thumbwheel19 for headlamp levelling
19 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87
Knob positions
Posi- tion
Specification
Daytime running lightsA when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.
Main beam flash can be used.
Daytime running lights, side marker lamps rear and position lamps when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.
Side marker lamps rear and position lamps when the car is parked.
Main beam flash can be used.
Posi- tion
Specification
Daytime running lights, side marker lamps rear and position lamps in daylight when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is run- ning.
Dipped beam, side marker lamps rear and position lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when rear fog lamps are acti- vated. On cars with active Xenon headlamps* (p. 92) the daytime running light lamps are switched on with reduced brightness.
The tunnel detection (p. 89)* function is activated.
The Active main beam (p. 90)* function can be used.
Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Posi- tion
Specification
Dipped beam, side marker lamps rear and position lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
On cars with active Xenon headlamps the daytime running light lamps are switched on with reduced brightness.
A Fitted in or under the front bumper.
Volvo recommends that mode is used when the car is driven.
WARNING
The car's audio system is not able to determine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensur- ing that the car is driven with a beam pat- tern suitable for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regula- tions.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Display and instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 79).
The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden.
1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's electrical system in key position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ lower beam alignment.
Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
Only driver
Driver and passenger in the front passen- ger seat
Occupants in all seats
Occupants in all seats and maximum load in the cargo area
Driver and maximum load in the cargo area
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have automatic headlamp levelling and are there- fore not equipped with the thumbwheel.
Related information Position lamps (p. 88)
Daytime running lights (p. 89)
Main/dipped beam (p. 90)
Position lamps Position lamps are switched on using the headlamp control's knob.
Knob for headlamp control in the position for position lamps.
Turn the knob to the position for (num- ber plate lighting is switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running then the daytime running lights also switch on.
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is opened the rear position lamps illuminate to alert traffic behind. This takes place irrespec- tive of what position the knob is in or what key position the car's electrical system is in.
Related information Light switches (p. 86)
03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89
Daytime running lights With the knob for headlamp control in position, and the car's electrical system in key position II or the engine running, the daytime running lights are activated automatically in daylight.
Daytime running lights during the day. DRL
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
With the knob for headlamp control in position the daytime running lights (Daytime Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati- cally when the car is driven in daylight. A light sensor on the top of the instrument panel changes from daytime running lights to dipped beam at twilight or when daylight becomes too weak. Switching to dipped beam also takes place when the rear fog lamps are activated.
On cars with halogen headlamps the daytime running light lamps are switched off when main or dipped beam is activated.
On cars with active Xenon headlamps (p. 92) the daytime running light lamps are switched on with reduced brightness when main or dipped beam is activated.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensur- ing that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regula- tions.
Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 90)
Light switches (p. 86)
Tunnel detection* Tunnel detection changes the lighting from daytime running lights to dipped beam when the car is driven into a tunnel.
The tunnel detection function is available in cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting from daytime running lights to dipped beam. Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel within this time period then dipped beam is kept switched on. This prevents frequent changes to the car's beam pattern.
Note that the headlamp control's knob must remain in position for tunnel detection to work.
Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 90)
Light switches (p. 86)
03 Instruments and controls
03
90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Main/dipped beam With the knob for headlamp control in posi- tion and the car's electrical system in key position II or the engine running, the dipped beam is activated automatically in poor light conditions.
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Dipped beam With the knob in position, dipped beam is activated automatically at dusk or when daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also activated automatically if the rear fog lamp is activated.
With the knob in position, dipped beam is always switched on when the engine is run- ning or when key position II is active.
Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.
Main beam Main beam can be activated when the knob is in position 20 or . Activate/deac- tivate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end posi- tion and then releasing. Alternatively, the main beam can be deactivated by a light press of the stalk switch toward the steering wheel.
When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the combined
instrument panel.
Related information Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 92)
Active main beam* (p. 90)
Light switches (p. 86)
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 98)
Tunnel detection* (p. 89)
Active main beam* Active main beam function detects the head- lamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and switches the lighting from main beam to dipped beam. The lighting returns to main beam when the incoming light has stopped.
Active main beam - AHB Active main beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. The function can also take streetlights into account.
The lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
20 When dipped beam is activated.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} 91
Activating/deactivating AHB can be activated when the headlamp control's knob is in position (provided that the function has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112)).
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (12 mph) or higher.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left- hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Deac- tivation when main beam is on means that the lights are reset directly to dipped beam.
Car with analogue combined instrument panel
When AHB is activated the symbol illu- minates in the instrument's information dis- play.
When main beam has been switched on the symbol also illuminates in the com-
bined instrument panel.
Car with digital combined instrument panel
When AHB is activated the symbol turns white in the instrument's information display.
When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue.
Manual operation
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.
If the message Active main beam Temporary unavailable Switch manually is shown in the combined instrument panel's information display then you have to switch manually between main and dipped beam. However, the knob for headlamp control can
still remain in position . The same applies if the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual and the symbol are shown. The symbol goes out when these messages are shown.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When AHB becomes available again, or the wind- screen sensors are no longer blocked, the message goes out and the symbol illu- minates.
WARNING
AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam pattern when conditions are favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require.
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching between main and dipped beam may be required:
In heavy rain or dense fog
In freezing rain
In snow flurries or slush
In moonlight
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
When the traffic ahead has weak light- ing
If there are pedestrians on or beside the road
If there are highly reflective objects such as signs in the vicinity of the road
When the lighting from oncoming traf- fic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
When there is traffic on connecting roads
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 231).
Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 90)
Light switches (p. 86)
Active Xenon headlamps* Active Xenon headlamps are designed to pro- vide maximum illumination in bends and junc- tions and so provide increased safety.
Active Xenon headlamps ABL
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- lamps (Active Bending Lights ABL) then the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maxi- mum lighting in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when the car is started (provided that it has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112)). In the event of a fault in the function the symbol illu-
minates in the combined instrument panel at the same time as the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illu- minated symbol.
Symbol Message Specification
Headlamp system malfunc- tion Serv- ice required
The system is disengaged. Visit a workshop if the message remains. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
The function is only active in twilight or dark- ness and only when the car is moving.
The function21 can be deactivated/activated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 90)
Active main beam* (p. 90)
Light switches (p. 86)
21 Activated on delivery from the factory.
03 Instruments and controls
03
93
Rear fog lamp When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog lamp can be used so that other road users can detect the vehicle in front at an early stage.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of one lamp and can only be switched on when key position II is active or the engine is running and the headlamp control's knob is in position or .
Press the button for On/Off. The indicator symbol in the combined instrument panel and the light in the button both illumi- nate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automati- cally when the START/STOP ENGINE button
is depressed or when the headlamp control's knob is turned to position or .
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.
Related information Light switches (p. 86)
Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking.
The brake light is switched on when the brake pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on when one of driving support systems Adaptive cruise control (p. 200), City Safety (p. 218) or Collision warning system (p. 225) brakes the car.
Related information Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 294)
03 Instruments and controls
03
94
Hazard warning flashers The hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when this function is activated.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warn- ing flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car has been braked so suddenly that the emergency brake lights have been activated and speed is below approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). The hazard warning flashers remain active when the car has stop- ped and are deactivated automatically when you start driving again; they can also be deactivated by pressing the button.
Related information direction indicators (p. 94)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 294)
direction indicators The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continu- ously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95
The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols, see Com- bined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 69).
Related information Hazard warning flashers (p. 94)
Interior lighting The passenger compartment lighting is acti- vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con- trols above the front seats and the rear seat.
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting (floor lamps* and ceiling lamps) - On/Off
Auto function for passenger compartment lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when:
the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0
the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.
Front reading lamps* The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the relevant button in the roof console.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Rear reading lamps*
Rear reading lamps.
The lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the relevant button.
Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Floor lighting as ambient light* To make the interior brighter while driving the floor lighting can be activated at dimmed level.
Floor lamp intensity can be changed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lighting in the front door storage compartments* Lighting in the front door storage compart- ments comes on when the engine starts.
Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror lighting The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 150) is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.
Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed.
Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The auto function is activated when the lamp in the AUTO button is lit.
The passenger compartment lighting is then switched on and off as indicated below.
The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
the car is unlocked with the remote con- trol key or key blade, see Remote control
key - functions (p. 162) or Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 166)
the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:
the engine is started
the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.
It remains switched on for two minutes if one of the doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after two minutes.
Ambience lights* When the normal passenger compartment lighting is switched off and the engine is run- ning, an LED illuminates in the front and rear roof console respectively in order to provide a low light and enhance the ambience while driving. The light also makes it easier during dark periods of the day to see objects in stor- age compartments, etc. This lighting switches off when the engine is switched off. The intensity and colour of the light can be changed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Home safe light duration Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam, position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as well as floor lighting.
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it. The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash; see Main/dipped beam (p. 90).
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam, position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting and floor lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information Approach light duration (p. 97)
03 Instruments and controls
03
97
Approach light duration Approach lighting consists of position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate light- ing, interior roof lighting as well as floor light- ing.
Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key, see Remote control key - functions (p. 162), and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote control key, position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, inte- rior roof lighting and floor lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information Home safe light duration (p. 96)
03 Instruments and controls
03
98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be set for right or left-hand traffic.
G 0 2 1 1 5 1
Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic.
G 0 2 1 1 5 2
Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic.
Active Xenon headlamps* The light pattern does not need to be adjusted. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens. The headlamp pattern may not be as good.
Masking the headlamps 1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand
drive cars or the C and D templates for right-hand drive cars, see later section "Templates for halogen headlamps". The templates have a scale of 1:2. Use a pho- tocopier with a zoom function for exam- ple, and copy the templates at 200 %:
A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens)
B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens)
C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens)
D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)
2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive waterproof material and cut it out.
3. Start from the design lines on the head- lamp lenses; see the lines in the following figure. Position the self-adhesive tem- plates at the design lines with the help of the illustration.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} 99
Upper row: left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
100
Templates for halogen headlamps
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101
Wipers and washers Wipers and washers clean the windscreen and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned with high-pressure washing.
Windscreen wipers22
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, On/Off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal speed.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear window) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.
Service position wiper blade For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades, see Car wash (p. 372) and Wiper blades (p. 355).
Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in the button is illuminated and the rain sensor symbol is shown in the combined instrument panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the remote control key in posi- tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sensor button . The windscreen wipers make one sweep.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sen- sitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra sweep is made when the thumb- wheel is turned upward.)
Deactivate Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sensor button or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program.
22 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 355). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 357).
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch off the rain sensor while the car is in motion or when the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the light in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
Washing function.
Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released.
High-pressure headlamp washing* High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message that you should fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined instrument panel, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it.
Wiping and washing the rear window
Rear window wiper intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in the illustration above) to initiate rear win- dow washing and wiping.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat in the motor and the outside temperature).
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103
Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear win- dow wiping23. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at con- tinuous speed, no change is made.
NOTE
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is activated during reversing if the sensor is activated and it is raining.
Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 357)
Power windows All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the con- trol panels for the other doors operate their respective power window.
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons; see Child safety locks - electrical activa- tion* (p. 179).
Rear window controls
Front window controls
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are not trapped when the windows are closed from the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are not trapped if/when the windows are closed using the remote control key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by selecting key posi- tion 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For infor- mation on key positions - see Key posi- tions - functions at different levels (p. 79).
23 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
104
Operating
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the con- trol panels for the other doors can only each operate their respective power window. Only one control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used, the key position must be at least I - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 79). The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the engine has been switched off and after the remote control key has been removed - although not after a door has been opened.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to override the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if there is ice forming. After two succes- sive closing interruptions the pinch protection will be forced and the automatic function deactivated for a short while, now it is possi- ble to close by continually holding the button pulled up.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.
Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down to the end position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key or central locking button To operate the power windows from the out- side with the remote control key or from inside with the central locking button, see Remote control key - functions (p. 162) or Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 174).
Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the func- tion for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the but- ton to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second.
WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protec- tion to work.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105
Door mirrors The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door controls.
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illumi- nates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.
Storing settings24
The settings for the rearview and door mirrors and the positions of the driver's seat can be stored for each remote control key in the car key memory*, see Remote control key - per- sonalisation* (p. 159).
Angling the door mirror when parking24
The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when park- ing for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by press- ing the button labelled L or R respectively.
Automatic angling of the door mirror when parking24
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for example. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after a short time.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Automatic retraction when locking24
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto- matically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/ extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- tons.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as neces- sary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv- ing in narrow spaces:
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultane- ously (key position must be at least I).
24 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 82).
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Release them after approximately 1 sec- ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi- tion.
Home safe and approach lighting The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting (p. 97) or home safe lighting (p. 96) is selected.
Related information Rearview mirror - interior (p. 107)
Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 106)
Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating The defroster is used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.
Heated windscreen*, rear window and door mirrors
Heating, windscreen
Heating, rear window and door mirrors
The function is used to remove ice and mist- ing from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.
One press of the respective button starts the heating. The light in the button indicates that the function is active. Switch off the heating as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the battery unnecessarily. How- ever, the function is switched off automati- cally after a certain time.
See also Demisting and defrosting the wind- screen (p. 135).
The door mirrors and rear window are demis- ted/defrosted automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than +7 C. Automatic defrosting can be selected in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
The compass (p. 108) is deactivated when the heated windscreen is activated. When the heated windscreen is deactivated, the com- pass is reactivated.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107
Rearview mirror - interior The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims auto- matically.
Control for dimming
Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control
for manual dimming is not available on mir- rors with automatic dimming.
The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing - that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward fac- ing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the rearview mirror is reduced.
Only rearview mirror with automatic dimming can be equipped with compass (p. 108).
Related information Door mirrors (p. 105)
Glass roof* The glass roof's blind can be operated with the control in the roof console.
The glass roof is fixed but the power oper- ated roller blind can be operated in key posi- tion I or II with the control in the roof console. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 79).
Automatic opening to end position
Manual opening until the button is released
Manual closing until the button is released
Automatic closing to end position
03 Instruments and controls
03
108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the blind because it may then be damaged.
Only use the control in the roof con- sole to operate the blind.
Compass* The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror contains a display that shows the com- pass direction in which the front of the car is pointing.
Operation
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different directions are shown with Eng- lish abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or when key position II is active, see Key positions - functions at differ- ent levels (p. 79). To deactivate/activate the compass - press in the button on the rear side of the mirror using a paper clip for exam- ple.
The compass is deactivated when the heated windscreen is activated. When the heated
windscreen is deactivated, the compass is reactivated.
Calibration The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass is set for the geographic area to which the car was delivered. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones. Proceed as follows:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2. Start the car.
NOTE
For the best calibration, switch off all elec- trical equipment (climate control system, wipers, etc.) and makes sure that all doors are closed.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed approx. 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic zone is shown.
03 Instruments and controls
03
109
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (115) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the bottom of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper clip) until the character C is shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a com- pass direction is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
7. Repeat the above procedure as neces- sary.
Menu navigation - combined instrument panel The menus shown on the information display in the combined instrument panel (p. 64) are controlled with the left-hand stalk switch. Which menus are shown depends on the key position (p. 79).
Information display (analogue combined instru- ment panel) and menu navigation controls.
Information displays (digital combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.
OK - access the menu, acknowledge messages and confirm menu selections.
Thumbwheel browse between menu options.
RESET - reset data in the selected trip computer step and go back in the menu structure.
If there is a message (p. 110) then it must be acknowledged with OK in order that the menus shall be shown.
Related information Messages - handling (p. 111)
Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 110)
Menu overview - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 110)
03 Instruments and controls
03
110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel Which menus are shown in the combined instrument panel's information display depends on the key position (p. 79).
Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car.
Digital speed
Parking heater*
Additional heater*
TC options
Service status
Oil level25
Messages (##)26
Related information Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 109)
Menu overview - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 110)
Combined instrument panel (p. 64)
Menu overview - digital combined instrument panel Which menus are shown in the combined instrument panel's information display depends on the key position (p. 79).
Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car.
Settings*
Themes
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Service status
Messages27
Oil level28
Parking heater*
Trip computer reset
Related information Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 109)
Menu overview - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 110)
Combined instrument panel (p. 64)
Messages When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message appears on the information display.
Message Specification
Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- shopB.
Stop engineA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work- shopB.
Service urgentA
Contact a workshopB to check the car immedi- ately.
Service requiredA
Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.
See manualA Read the owner's man- ual.
Book time for mainte- nance
Time to book regular service - contact a work- shopB.
25 Certain engines. 26 The number of messages is indicated in brackets. 27 The number of messages is indicated in brackets. 28 Certain engines.
03 Instruments and controls
03
111
Message Specification
Time for reg- ular mainte- nance
Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. The timing is determined by the number of kilometres driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time and oil grade.
Maintenance overdue
If the service intervals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts - contact a workshopB.
Transmis- sion Oil change nee- ded
Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.
Transmis- sion Reduced performance
Transmission cannot han- dle full capacity. Drive with care until the mes- sage clearsC.
If shown repeatedly - contact a workshopB.
Message Specification
Transmis- sion hot Reduce speed
Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clearsC.
Transmis- sion hot Stop safely Wait for cooling
Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe manner and contact a workshopB.
Temporarily offA
A function has been tem- porarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after star- ting again.
Low battery charge Power save mode
The audio system is switched off to save energy. Charge the bat- tery.
A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.
B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. C For more messages concerning automatic gearbox.
Related information Messages - handling (p. 111)
Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 109)
Messages - handling Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge and browse among messages (p. 110) that are shown in the information display of the combined instrument panel.
When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message is shown in the display. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified.
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge29 a message. Scroll through messages with the thumbwheel (p. 109).
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press OK) before the previ- ous activity can be resumed.
Related information Menu overview - analogue combined
instrument panel (p. 110)
Menu overview - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 110)
29 A message can also be acknowledged via the thumbwheel or RESET button.
03 Instruments and controls
03
112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
MY CAR MY CAR is a menu source that handles many of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.
Certain functions are standard, others are optional - the range also varies depending on the market.
Operation Navigation in the menus is carried out using buttons in the centre console or with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*.
Control panel in centre console and steering wheel keypad. The figure is schematic - the num- ber of functions and layout of the buttons both
vary, depending on the equipment selected and the market.
MY CAR - opens the menu system MY CAR.
OK/MENU - press the button in the cen- tre console or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to select/tick in the high- lighted menu option or store the selected function in the memory.
TUNE - turn the knob in the centre con- sole or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to scroll up/down through the menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions Depending on the function the cursor is on when EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which menu level, one of the following may occur:
phone call is rejected
current function is interrupted
input characters are deleted
most recent selections are undone
leads up in the menu system.
A long press on EXIT leads to the normal view for MY CAR or if you are in the normal view, to the highest menu level (main source menu).
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113
Menu options and search paths For a description of the menu options and search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Trip computer The car's trip computer records and calcu- lates vales such as e.g. distance, fuel con- sumption and average speed whilst driving.
Trip computer content and appearance varies depending on whether the combined instru- ment panel is analogue or digital:
Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 115)
Trip computer - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 119)
The information from the trip computer can be shown in the combined instrument panel's infor- mation display30.
Trip meter The trip computer has two trip meters and one odometer for the total mileage.
Average Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if a fuel- driven heater* has been used.
Average speed The average speed is calculated for the driv- ing distance driven since the last reset to zero.
Instantaneous The information for current fuel consumption is updated continuously - approximately once per second. When the car is driven at low speed the consumption is shown per time unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to mileage.
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for the display - see section below."Change unit" (p. 113)
Range - distance to empty tank The trip computer shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank.
No guaranteed range remains when the head- ing Distance to empty shows "----".
In which case, refuel as soon as possible.
30 The appearance and showing of the display may vary depending on the instrument variant.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driv- ing style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. For more informa- tion on how fuel consumption can be influ- enced, see Environmental philosophy (p. 23).
Digital speed display The speed is shown in the opposite unit31
(kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument. If it is calibrated in mph then the trip com- puter shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa.
Change unit You can change unit (km/miles) for distance and speed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
NOTE
In addition to in the trip computer, these units are also changed in Volvo's naviga- tion system*.
Related information Trip computer - analogue combined
instrument panel (p. 115)
Trip computer - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 119)
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 122)
31 Only with combined instrument panel "Digital".
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} 115
Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel
The information from the trip computer can be shown in the combined instrument panel and operated with the controls on the left- hand stalk switch and with the combined instrument panel's menu.
Checking and settings can be made immedi- ately after the combined instrument panel is automatically illuminated in connection with unlocking. If none of the trip computer's con- trols are actuated within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened then the instrument extinguishes, after which either key position II or engine starting is required in order to operate the trip com- puter.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated.
Acknowledge the message by briefly pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Controls
Information display and controls.
OK - opens the combined instrument panel's menu, confirms messages or menu selections.
Thumbwheel - browses between menu options or trip computer options.
RESET - resets the current trip meter or goes back out of the menu structure.
Trip computer alternative Choose which trip computer should be shown:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - reset them first with two presses on RESET.
2. Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the options and stop at the required heading.
The trip computer display in the combined instrument panel can be shifted to another option at any time during the journey. One of the options means that no trip computer is shown.
Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel
Information
Trip meter T1 and total dist. Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Trip meter T2 and total dist. Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
116
Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel
Information
Distance to empty For more information - see the section"Range - distance to empty tank" (p. 113).
Fuel consumption Current consumption.
Average speed Long press on RESET resets Average speed.
No trip computer information. This option shows a blank display and it also indicates the beginning/end of the loop.
Resetting the trip computer 1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the trip
computer heading to be reset: T1 and total dist., T2 and total dist. or Average speed.
2. One long press on RESET resets the value for the selected heading.
Each heading must be zeroed individu- ally.
Functions in the combined instrument panel's menu The combined instrument panel's menu includes setting options for trip computer. Open the menu to check/adjust the functions in the table below.
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - reset them first with two presses on RESET.
2. Press OK.
3. Browse through the functions with the thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after completed checking/adjustment.
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117
Functions Information
Digital speed
km/h
mph
No display
Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel.
Parking heater*
DIRECT START
Timer 1
Timer 2
For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - timer (p. 141).
Additional heater*
Auto On
Off
For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 143).
TC options
Distance to empty tank
Fuel consumption
Average speed
Trip meter T1 and total dist.
Trip meter T2 and total dist.
Here you can activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in the trip computer. The symbols for the options already selected are white with a "tick" - others are grey and have no "tick".
Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.
Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 344).
Messages (##) For more information, see Messages (p. 110).
A Certain engines.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information Trip computer (p. 113)
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 122)
03 Instruments and controls
03
}} 119
Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel
The information from the trip computer can be shown in the combined instrument panel and operated with the controls on the left- hand stalk switch and with the combined instrument panel's menu.
Checking and settings can be made immedi- ately after the combined instrument panel is automatically illuminated in connection with unlocking. If none of the trip computer's con- trols are actuated within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened then the instrument extinguishes, after which either key position II or engine starting is required in order to operate the trip com- puter.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated.
Acknowledge the message by briefly pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Controls
Three trip computer options can be displayed simultaneously - one in each "window".
OK - opens the combined instrument panel's menu, confirms messages or menu selections.
Thumbwheel - browses between menu options or trip computer options.
RESET - resets the current trip meter or goes back out of the menu structure.
Trip computer alternative Choose which trip computer should be shown:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - reset them first with two presses on RESET.
2. Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the heading combinations.
3. Stop at the required combination for the constant display of this trip data in the combined instrument panel.
The trip computer display in the combined instrument panel can be shifted to another option at any time during the journey. One of the options means that no trip computer is shown.
Heading combinations Information
Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty tank Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
|| 03 Instruments and controls
03
120
Heading combinations Information
Instantaneous Meter reading km/h<>mph km/h<>mph - "Digital speed display", see Trip computer (p. 113).
No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays and it also indicates the beginning/end of the loop.
Resetting the trip computer
Trip meter 1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the
heading combination with the trip meter to be reset.
2. One long press on RESET resets the value for the selected heading.
Average speed and average consumption 1. Press OK to open the combined instru-
ment panel's menu.
2. Browse to the Trip computer reset menu option with the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
3. Choose to reset average consumption, average speed or to reset both. Confirm the selection with OK.
4. Finish by pressing RESET.
Functions in the combined instrument panel's menu The combined instrument panel's menu includes setting options for trip computer.
Open the menu to check/adjust the functions in the table below.
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - reset them first with two presses on RESET.
2. Press OK.
3. Browse through the functions with the thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after completed checking/adjustment.
Functions Information
Trip computer reset
Average
Average speed
Reset the value of average fuel consumption and average speed.
Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2.
Messages For more information, see Messages (p. 110).
Themes Select the theme for the appearance of the combined instrument panel, see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 65).
03 Instruments and controls
03
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121
Functions Information
Settings* Select Auto On or Off.
For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 143).
Contrast mode/Colour mode Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Parking heater*
Direct start
Timer 1
Timer 2
For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 141).
Service status Shows the number of months and the distance until the next service.
Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 344).
A Certain engines.
Related information Trip computer (p. 113)
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 122)
03 Instruments and controls
03
122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Trip computer - trip statistics* Trip statistics from the trip computer can be shown in the centre console's screen and provide a graphic overview of fuel consump- tion.
Function Open the menu system MY CAR (p. 112)
and select Trip statistics in order to see the bar chart.
Trip statistics32.
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven distance, depending on the scale selected - the bar at the far right shows the value for the current kilometre or 10 km.
The TUNE knob can be used to change the scale for each bar between 1 km and 10 km - the cursor at the far right changes position
between up and down depending on the scale selected.
Settings Different settings can be made in the menu system MY CAR - Trip statistics.
Reset when vehicle has been off for minimum 4h - highlight the box by selecting ENTER and go back out of the menu by selecting EXIT. With this option selected, all statistics are deleted auto- matically after finishing driving and the car has been stationary for more than 4 hours. The journey statistics start again from zero the next time the engine is started.
Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete all previous statistics, back out of the menu by selecting EXIT. If a new driving cycle shall be started before 4 hours have elapsed then the current period must first be deleted manually with this option.
See also information on Eco guide (p. 68).
Related information Trip computer (p. 113)
Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 115)
Trip computer - digital combined instru- ment panel (p. 119)
32 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on updated software and market.
CLIMATE CONTROL
04 Climate control
04
124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
General information on climate control The car is equipped with electronic climate control. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.
There are two different climate control sys- tems:
Electronic temperature control (ETC) (p. 131)
Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 130)
NOTE
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 134) can be switched off, but to ensure the best possi- ble climate comfort in the passenger com- partment, and to prevent the windows from misting, it should always be switched on.
To bear in mind To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows must be closed.
Global opening (p. 175) opens/closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.
Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).
In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full acceleration, the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off. There may then be a temporary increase in tem- perature in the passenger compartment.
Remove misting on the insides of the win- dows primarily by using the defroster function (p. 135). To reduce the risk of misting, keep the windows clean and use window cleaner.
Cars with Start/Stop* With an auto-stopped (p. 281) engine certain equipment may have its function temporarily reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed (p. 133).
Cars with ECO* Certain equipment may have its function tem- porarily reduced or deactivated when the ECO (p. 290) function is activated, e.g. the air conditioning (p. 134).
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, sev- eral parameters in the climate control sys- tem's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only restored by deactivating the ECO function.
Related information Actual temperature (p. 125)
Sensors - climate control (p. 125)
Menu settings - climate control (p. 127)
Air distribution in the passenger compart- ment (p. 128)
Air quality (p. 125)
Heated front seats* (p. 132)
Heated rear seat* (p. 132)
04 Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125
Actual temperature The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as ambient temperature, air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in and around the car at the time.
The system includes a sun sensor (p. 125) which detects on which side the sun is shin- ing into the passenger compartment. This means1 that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Temperature control in the passenger compartment (p. 134)
Sensors - climate control The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the temperature (p. 125) in the car.
The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard.
The temperature sensor for the passen- ger compartment is located below the cli- mate control panel.
The outside temperature sensor is located in the door mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Air quality The interior in a passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Passenger compartment filter (p. 126)
Material in the passenger compartment (p. 127)
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) (p. 126)*
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p. 127)*
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
1 Only applies to ECC.
04 Climate control
04
126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Air quality - passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compart- ment is cleaned with a filter.
The filter must be replaced at regular inter- vals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the cor- rect filter is fitted.
Related information Air quality (p. 125)
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* CZIP comprises a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing sub- stances.
The following is included:
An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.
The air quality system IAQS (p. 127) is a fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from con- taminants such as particles, hydrocar- bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.
NOTE
To maintain the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP the IAQS filter should be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depend- ing on whichever occurs first. However, up to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP and where the customer does not want to retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS filter must be replaced during a regular service.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Air quality (p. 125)
04 Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127
Air quality - IAQS* The air quality system IAQS separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment.
If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed in order to shut out hydrocar- bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. The air is recirculated in the passenger com- partment.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func- tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be ena- bled to ensure the best air in the passen- ger compartment.
In a cold climate, automatic recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Air quality (p. 125)
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* (p. 126)
Air quality - material Tested materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compart- ment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 375).
Related information Air quality (p. 125)
Menu settings - climate control It is possible to activate/deactivate or change the default settings for four of the climate control system's functions via the centre con- sole.
Fan level during automatic climate con- trol* (p. 133).
Recirculation timer (p. 136).
Automatic start of rear window defroster (p. 106).
Interior air quality system* (p. 127).
The climate control system's functions can be reset to the default settings via the menu sys- tem in MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
04 Climate control
04
128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Air distribution in the passenger compartment The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compart- ment.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode*.
If necessary it can be controlled manually; see the air distribution table (p. 137).
Air vents in the dashboard
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the side windows to remove misting.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sen- sitive to air flows and draughts.
Air distribution
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When pressing the buttons the corresponding figure is illuminated in the display screen (see figure below) and an arrow in front of each part of the figure shows the air distribution that is selected. For more information, see the air distribution table (p. 137).
04 Climate control
04
129
The selected air distribution is shown in the cen- tre console display screen.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Auto-regulation (p. 133)
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 136)
04 Climate control
04
130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Electronic climate control - ECC* ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the temperature selected in the passenger
compartment and can be set separately for the driver's side and passenger side.
The auto function is used to automatically control temperature, air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation and air distribution.
Fan (p. 133)
AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 133)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 132), left side
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster (p. 135)
Air distribution (p. 128) - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 106)
Setting, left/right-hand side for tempera- ture control (p. 134)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 132), right side
Temperature control (p. 134)
Recirculation (p. 136)
ECO* (p. 290)
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 134)
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
04 Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131
Electronic temperature control - ETC The passenger compartment's climate com- fort is controlled manually using the ETC (Electronic Temperature Control).
Fan (p. 133)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 132), left side
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 134)
Heated windscreen and max. defroster*
Air distribution (p. 128) - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrost- ers (p. 106)
Recirculation (p. 136)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 132), right side
Temperature control (p. 134)
ECO* (p. 290)
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
04 Climate control
04
132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Heated front seats* The front seat heating has three positions for increasing the comfort for driver and passen- ger when it is cold.
Current heat level is shown in the centre console display screen.
Press the button repeatedly in order to acti- vate the function:
Highest heat level - three orange fields illuminate in the centre console's screen (see figure above).
Lower heat level - two orange fields illu- minate in the screen.
Lowest heat level - one orange field illu- minates in the screen.
Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Other- wise they may suffer burn injuries.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Heated rear seat* (p. 132)
Heated rear seat* The heating for the rear seat's outer positions has three positions for increasing the comfort for passengers when it is cold.
Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's lamps:
Press the button repeatedly in order to acti- vate the function:
Highest heat level - three lamps illumi- nate.
Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
04 Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Other- wise they may suffer burn injuries.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Heated front seats* (p. 132)
Fan The fan should always be activated in order to avoid misting on the windows.
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged - which can cause a risk of misting on the windows.
With ECC* Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed, AUTO is disengaged. If AUTO is selected, then the fan speed is regulated automatically (p. 133) - the fan speed pre- viously set is disengaged.
With ETC Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 130)
Electronic temperature control - ETC (p. 131)
Auto-regulation Auto-regulation is only possible in electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 130).
The auto function automati- cally regulates temperature (p. 134), air conditioning (p. 134), fan speed (p. 133), recirculation (p. 136) and air distribution (p. 128).
If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled automatically. All manual settings are disen- gaged when AUTO is pressed. The display screen shows AUTO CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
04 Climate control
04
134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Temperature control in the passenger compartment When the car is started, the most recent tem- perature setting is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.
With ECC*
Current temperature for each side is shown in the centre console's display screen.
The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set independently. Repeatedly press L/R in the button to select the setting for left, right or both sides. Set the temperature using
the knob - the selected temperature for either side is displayed in the centre console dis- play.
With ETC The temperature in the pas- senger compartment can be adjusted with the knob.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Actual temperature (p. 125)
Electronic temperature control - ETC (p. 131)
Electronic climate control - ECC* (p. 130)
Air conditioning The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required.
When the lamp in the AC button illuminates, the air conditioning is controlled by the system's automatic func- tion.
When the lamp in the AC button is switched off the air conditioning is disconnected. Other functions are still con- trolled automatically. When the max. defroster function (p. 135) is activated, the air conditioning is switched on automatically so that the air is dehumidified at the maximum setting.
04 Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135
Demisting and defrosting the windscreen Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows.
The selected setting is shown in the centre con- sole display screen.
Heated windscreen*
Max. defroster
The light in the defroster but- ton illuminates when the function is active.
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the func- tion.
For cars without heated windscreens:
Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illu- minates in the screen.
Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- nates.
For cars with heated windscreens:
Start the heating for the windscreen2 - symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
Start the heating for the windscreen2 and air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and (2) illuminate in the screen.
Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- nates.
NOTE
Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 21) may have an impact on the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer.
NOTE
Electrically heated windscreen is not avail- able when the engine is auto-stopped (p. 281).
The following also takes place when the func- tion is active in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compart- ment:
the air conditioning is automatically engaged
recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is operating at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
2 The compass goes off when the heated windscreen is active.
04 Climate control
04
136
Air distribution - recirculation Select recirculation to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passenger com- partment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated.
When recirculation is engaged the orange lamp in the button illuminates.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
Timer With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the out- side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting and bad air.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the func- tion in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recircula- tion is always deactivated.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Air distribution in the passenger compart- ment (p. 128)
Air distribution - table (p. 137)
04 Climate control
04
}} 137
Air distribution - table Three buttons are used to select the distribu- tion (p. 128) of the air.
Air distribution Use
A large amount of hot air flows to the windows. to remove ice and misting quickly.
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.
to avoid misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this the fan level must not be too low).
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
|| 04 Climate control
04
138
Air distribution Use
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dash- board air vents.
to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and win- dows.
to direct heat or cold to the floor.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or warming upwards in cold weather.
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 136)
04 Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* Preconditioning prepares the heater, engine and passenger compartment before depar- ture so that both wear and energy needs dur- ing the journey are reduced. Warming up your car will also extend the driving distance.
The heater can be started directly (p. 140) or with a timer (p. 141).
The heater cannot start if the outside tem- perature exceeds 15 C. At 5 C or lower the maximum running time of the heater is 50 minutes.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors. Exhaust gases are secreted.
NOTE
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from under- neath the car, which is perfectly normal.
Refuelling
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater before starting to refuel.
Check in the combined instrument panel that the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is shown when it is operating.
Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven heater.
Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the heater will be switched off automatically and a message
appears in the display. Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator stalk (p. 109) OK button once.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the heater in combination with short driving distances may cause low charge level in the starter battery, this can lead to the heater stopping or never star- ting. In the worst case, engine starting will not be possible.
The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the starter battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis. The heater is used for a maximum of 50 minutes each time.
Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - messages (p. 142)
Additional heater* (p. 143)
04 Climate control
04
140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start The engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater can be started directly.
Direct start can be performed via:
information display
remote control key*
mobile*.
Upon direct start of the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 139), it will run for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the heater is running.
Direct start via the information display 1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct start in order to activate the heater and select with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Direct start via the remote control key*
Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.
The engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater can be activated via the remote control key:
Hold the button for approach lighting depressed for 2 seconds.
Hazard warning flashers provide informa- tion in accordance with the following:
5 short flashes followed by a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal has reached the car and the heater has been activated.
5 short flashes - the signal has reached the car but the heater has not been activated.
Hazard warning flashers remain switched off - the signal has not reached the car.
If the button for information is depressed when the heater is active then the indicator lamp will show the status for this - at the same time the car's lock status (p. 164) is shown. While the status is being investigated the indicator lamp emits a pair of short flashes followed by a constant glow if the heater is active.
Status is also shown in the trip computer dur- ing heating.
Direct start via a mobile* Activation and information about the selected settings that can be managed from a mobile phone will be available via the Volvo On Call* mobile app.
Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - timer (p. 141)
Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - immediate stop (p. 141)
Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - messages (p. 142)
04 Climate control
04
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - immediate stop The engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater can be deactivated directly via the information display.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Stop in order to deactivate the heater and select with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - direct start (p. 140)
Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - timer (p. 141)
Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - messages (p. 142)
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer The timer of the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 139) is connected to the car's clock.
Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic system calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.
Adjusting 1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel (p. 109) to Parking heater and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours setting.
5. Select the required hour using the thumb- wheel.
6. Briefly press OK to move to the lit minutes setting.
7. Select the required minute using the thumbwheel.
8. Press OK3 to confirm the setting.
9. Go back in the menu structure using RESET.
10. Select the other time (continue from step 2) or exit the menu with RESET.
Starting 1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and activate with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Switching off A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as follows:
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK. > If a timer is set but not activated, a
clock icon is shown next to the set time.
3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
3 Press OK again to activate the timer.
|| 04 Climate control
04
142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. Deactivate the timer as follows:
long press on OK or
short press on OK to continue in the menu. Then select to stop the timer and confirm with OK.
5. Exit the menu with RESET.
A timer-started heater can be switched off directly (p. 140).
Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - messages (p. 142)
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages Symbols and messages regarding the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 139) differ depending on whether the com- bined instrument panel is analogue (p. 64) or digital (p. 65).
When the heater has been activated the heat symbol illuminates in the information display.
When one of the timers is activated the sym- bol for activated timer illuminates in the infor- mation display at the same time as the set time is shown next to the symbol.
Symbol for activated timer in ana- logue combined instrument panel.
Symbol for activated timer in digital combined instrument panel.
The table shows symbols and display texts that appear.
Sym- bol
Mes- sage
Specification
The heater is switched on and running.
The heater's timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch and leaving the car - the engine and passenger com- partment are heated at the set time.
Fuel operated heater stopped Battery saving mode
The heater has been stopped by the car's electron- ics in order to facilitate starting the engine.
04 Climate control
04
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143
Sym- bol
Mes- sage
Specification
Fuel operated heater stopped Low fuel level
Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
Fuel operated heater Service required
Heater not work- ing. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo work- shop.
A display text clears automatically after a time or after one press on the indicator stalk (p. 109) OK button.
Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - direct start (p. 140)
Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - timer (p. 141)
Additional heater* For cars with diesel engines sold in cold cli- mate zones4 an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operating tem- perature in the engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the passenger compartment.
In such instances, the car is equipped with either
electric additional heater (p. 144) or
fuel-driven additional heater (p. 143)5.
Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* (p. 139)
Fuel-driven additional heater* The car is equipped with either an electric (p. 144) or a fuel-driven additional heater (p. 143).
The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater's automatic start sequence can be switched off if required.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven additional heater should be switched off for short distances.
1. Before starting the engine: Select key position I (p. 79).
2. Press OK to access the menu.
4 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned. 5 For cars equipped with parking heater (p. 139).
|| 04 Climate control
04
144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional heater6 or Settings7 and select with OK.
4. Select one of the options ON or OFF using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
5. Exit the menu with RESET.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key position I - any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine.
Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* (p. 139)
Electric additional heater* The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven (p. 143) or an electric additional heater (p. 143).
The heater cannot be controlled manually but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside tempera- tures below 9 C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached.
Related information Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* (p. 139)
6 Analogue combined instrument panel. 7 Digital combined instrument panel.
LOADING AND STORAGE
05 Loading and storage
05
146
Storage spaces Overview of storage spaces in the passenger compartment.
05 Loading and storage
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147
Storage compartment1 in door panel
Storage compartment, drivers side (p. 148)
Ticket clip
Storage compartment
Glovebox (p. 149)
Storage compartment, cup holder (p. 148)
Cup holder* in rear seat
Storage pocket2
Storage compartment, rear seat
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.
1 With ice scraper holder on the drivers side. 2 Not applicable to textile upholstery.
05 Loading and storage
05
148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Storage compartment drivers side This storage compartment (p. 146) is located on the driver's side, to the left under the light- ing panel.
WARNING
Do not keep any sharp objects in the com- partment, or objects which protrude.
Tunnel console The tunnel console is located between the front seats.
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and pas- senger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter (p. 149) are specified, then there is a cig- arette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 150) for the front seat, and a detachable ash- tray in the cup holder.)
Related information Storage spaces (p. 146)
Tunnel console - armrest (p. 148)
Tunnel console - armrest The tunnel console is located between the front seats.
When closed, the tunnel console's armrest can be adjusted* longitudinally.
Related information Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 150)
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray* (p. 149)
05 Loading and storage
05
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray* A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 150) for the front seat.
The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 148) is detached by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.
Related information Storage spaces (p. 146)
Glovebox The glovebox is located on the passenger side.
The owner's manual and maps can be kept in here for example. There are also holders for pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be locked* (p. 175), using the key blade (p. 166).
Related information Storage spaces (p. 146)
Inlaid mats* Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay mats.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 375)
05 Loading and storage
05
150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Vanity mirror The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the sun visor.
Vanity mirror with lighting.
The light illuminates automatically when the cover is lifted.
Related information Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 354)
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets The electrical sockets (12 V) are located in the tunnel console's storage compartment and beside the cup holder3.
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The electrical sockets can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. screens, music players and mobile phones. For the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least key position I (p. 79).
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones - which are connected to one of the passenger compartment's 12V electri- cal sockets could be activated by the cli- mate control system, even when the remote control key has been removed or when the car is locked, for example, when the engine block and passenger compart- ment heater* is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence!
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W) in either socket.
NOTE
The compressor for emergency puncture repair (p. 330) has been tested and approved by Volvo. For information on the use of Volvo's recommended temporary emergency puncture repair (TMK).
3 If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.
05 Loading and storage
05
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151
Related information Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray* (p. 149)
12 V socket - cargo area (p. 154)
Loading Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight.
For more detailed information on weights, see Weights (p. 383).
The tailgate is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote control key, see Locking/unlocking -
tailgate (p. 175).
WARNING
The cars driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load.
To bear in mind when loading Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Note that objects must not prevent the func- tion of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down, see WHIPS - seating position (p. 41).
Centre the load.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro- mised or eliminated by high loads.
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing personal injury to the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the park- ing brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.
|| 05 Loading and storage
05
152
Related information Load retaining eyelets (p. 153)
Cargo net (p. 155)
Loading - long load (p. 152)
Roof load (p. 152)
Loading - long load To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear seat backrest can be folded down. The pas- senger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load.
Folding the passenger seat See Seats, front (p. 81).
Lowering the rear seat backrest See (p. 84).
Related information Loading (p. 151)
Roof load The load carriers recommended for roof loads are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety dur- ing a journey.
Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.
Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads.
For information about the maximum per- mitted load on the roof, including load car- riers and any space box, see Weights (p. 383).
Related information Loading (p. 151)
05 Loading and storage
05
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153
Load retaining eyelets The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information Loading (p. 151)
Loading - bag holder The bag holders keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their contents around the cargo area. The holder has a capacity of max. 3 kg.
Bag holder
Related information Loading (p. 151)
Loading - folding bag holder* (p. 153)
Loading - folding bag holder* A folding bag holder in the floor keeps bags in place and prevents them from overturning and spreading their contents in the cargo area, and can be opened up in three posi- tions.
Folding bag holder
It can be set to two adjustment positions and one service position, as it is known, where it is fully unfolded. There are also two floor combination variants, one with adjustment positions in a tub under the floor and one with adjustment positions in plastic rails. The rais- ing below shows the adjustment position in a tub under the floor.
The load on the central holder is max. 3 kg and max. 10 kg on the outer holder.
|| 05 Loading and storage
05
154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Folding up
Lift the handle* on the upper floor and fold up the floor.
Move the floor forwards to an appropriate position and place it in the adjustment groove.
3. In service position, the floor is moved all the way forwards towards the rear seat back and placed in the plastic support in the centre.
Related information Loading (p. 151)
Loading - bag holder (p. 153)
12 V socket - cargo area The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 Volts, e.g. dis- play screens, music players and mobile phones.
Lower the cover to access the electrical socket.
The socket also provides voltage when the remote control key is not in the igni- tion switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. socket current is 10 A (120 W).
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car's battery.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo. For information on the use of Volvo's recommended temporary emergency puncture repair (TMK), see Emergency puncture repair* (p. 330).
Related information Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 150)
05 Loading and storage
05
}} 155
Cargo net A cargo net prevents cargo from being thrown forward in the passenger compart- ment in the event of heavy braking.
The cargo net is fitted into four mounting points.
For safety reasons, the cargo net must always be correctly fastened and secured. The mesh is made of a strong nylon fabric and secured behind the front seat backrests.
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also have a cor- rectly fitted safety net.
Attaching
NOTE
The easiest way to fit the safety net is via one of the rear doors.
WARNING
It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller-straps are secured properly. Damaged nets must not be used.
1. Hook the hooks into the roof mounting with the anchoring strap locks turned towards you.
Thread the cargo net's anchoring straps through the eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved forward slightly.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat/backrest hard against the net when the seat/backrest is moved back again - only adjust until the seat/ backrest makes contact with the net.
IMPORTANT
If a seat/backrest is pushed backwards hard into the safety net then the net and/or its roof mounts may be damaged.
|| 05 Loading and storage
05
156
2. Depress the button in the anchoring strap's lock and thread the anchoring strap from below through the lock.
Tension the cargo net with the anchoring straps.
Removal and storage 1. Release the tension in the cargo net by
pressing in the button on the anchoring strap's lock and feeding out the strap.
2. Unhook the hooks from the roof mount- ings.
3. Fold up the cargo net and place it in the storage bag in the cargo area.
Related information Loading (p. 151)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 153)
Hat shelf The hat shelf can be removed to provide additional cargo space.
Hat shelf removal
Undo the hat shelf lifting eyes on both sides.
Unhook the front edge of the hat shelf and remove it.
Related information Loading (p. 151)
Loading - long load (p. 152)
LOCKS AND ALARM
06 Locks and alarm
06
158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key Amongst other things, the remote control key is used for locking/unlocking and starting the engine.
There are three variants of key available - Remote control key in basic version, Remote control key without PCC* and Remote control key with PCC*.
Function- ality
BasicA with- out
PCCA
with PCCB
Locking/ unlocking and detach- able key blade
x x x
Keyless locking/ unlocking
x x
Keyless engine star- ting
x x
Information button and indicator lamps
x
A 5-button key B 6-button key
More information Remote Control Key Basic - is a key in
the basic version, see Remote control key - functions (p. 162) for a description of its functions.
Remote control key without PCC - with Keyless Drive* (p. 168) and keyless lock- ing (p. 170) and unlocking (p. 170).
Remote control key with PCC - also has an information button and indicator lamps. Read more about these unique functions (p. 164).
All remote control keys have a detachable key blade (p. 165) made of metal. The visible section is available in two versions so that it is possible to distinguish between the remote control keys.
More remote control keys can be ordered - but not variants other than the one supplied with the car. Up to six keys can be pro- grammed and used for one single car.
The car is supplied with two remote control keys.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
Remote control key - losing If you lose a remote control key (p. 158) then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention meas- ure. The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 162)
Remote control key - range (p. 163)
06 Locks and alarm
06
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159
Remote control key - personalisation* The key memory in the remote control key means that certain settings in the car can be individually adapted for different people.
The key memory function is available in com- bination with, for example, power* driver's seat (p. 82).
Settings for door mirrors (p. 105), driver's seat, steering force (p. 260) and the com- bined instrument panel's theme, contrast and colour mode (p. 65) can be stored in the key memory, depending on the car's equipment level.
The function1 can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
When the function is activated, the settings are automatically linked to the key memory. This means that a change in a setting will automatically be saved in the specific remote control key's memory.
Storing settings Proceed as follows in order to store the set- tings and use the key memory in the remote control key:
1. Unlock the car with the remote control key in whose memory the setting2 shall be stored.
2. Make sure that the key memory function is activated in the menu system MY CAR.
3. Make the desired settings for e.g. the seat and the door mirrors.
4. The settings are stored in the current remote control key's memory.
The next time the car is unlocked with the same remote control key, the positions that are stored in the key memory will be set auto- matically - providing that they have been changed since the last time the current remote control key was used.
Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key. The driver's door must then be open.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Make sure that none of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger of becoming trap- ped.
Changing settings If several people each with a remote control key approach the car, then the settings for e.g. seat and door mirrors are implemented for the person whose remote control key unlocks the driver's door.
If the driver's door has been opened by person A with remote control key A, but person B with remote control key B shall drive, then the settings can be changed as follows:
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting behind the steering wheel, person B presses the button for unlocking on his/her remote control key.
Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1-3.
Adjust the seat and door mirrors man- ually.
1 Known as Car key memory in MY CAR. 2 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
|| 06 Locks and alarm
06
160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 162)
Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 164)
Locking/unlocking - indicator When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key (p. 158) the direction indi- cators confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly performed.
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors are folded3 in.
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir- rors are folded3 out.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.
When locking, indication is given only if all locks have been locked and all doors are closed. Indication is given when the last door has been closed.
Selecting the function Different options for indicating locking/ unlocking with light can be set in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information Keyless drive* (p. 168)
Lock indicator (p. 160)
Alarm indicator (p. 181)
Lock indicator A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that the car is locked.
Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 181).
NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also have this indicator.
Related information Locking/unlocking - indicator (p. 160)
3 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
06 Locks and alarm
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161
Remote control key - electronic immobiliser The electronic immobiliser is a theft protec- tion system that prevents the vehicle from being started (p. 269) by an unauthorised person.
Each remote control key (p. 158) has a unique code. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the com- bined instrument panel's information display are related to the electronic immobiliser:
Mes- sage
Specification
Insert car key
Error when reading the remote control key during starting - Remove the key from the ignition switch, press it in again and make a new start attempt.
Car key not foundA
Error reading the remote con- trol key during starting - Try to start again.
If the error persists: Insert the remote control key into the ignition switch and try to start again.
Immobi- liser Try to start again
Error in immobiliser system during starting. If the error persists: Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.
A Only applies to cars with keyless start and lock system.
Related information Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system* (p. 161)
Keyless drive* (p. 168)
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system* Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system4 makes it possible to track and locate the car, and to remotely activate the immobi- liser to switch off the engine.
Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more information and assistance with activating the system.
Related information Remote control key (p. 158)
Remote control key - electronic immobi- liser (p. 161)
4 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.
06 Locks and alarm
06
162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key - functions The remote control key has functions such as locking and unlocking the doors.
Functions
Remote control key in basic version.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
Remote control key with PCC* (Personal Car Communicator).
Information button - see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 164) for a description of its functionality.
Function buttons Locking Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated, see Locking/ unlocking - from the outside (p. 172).
Press and hold to close all windows simulta- neously. For more information, see Global opening (p. 175).
WARNING
If windows are closed using the remote control key, check that nobody's hands are trapped.
Unlocking (p. 172) - Unlocks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.
Press and hold to open all windows simulta- neously. For more information, see Global opening (p. 175).
The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's door only with one press of the but- ton and, after a further press of the button - within ten seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.
The function can be changed in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Approach light duration (p. 97) - Used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
Tailgate (p. 175) - Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only.
Panic function Used to attract atten- tion in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least three seconds or press it twice within three sec- onds to activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least five seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after approx. three minutes.
06 Locks and alarm
06
163
Related information Remote control key (p. 158)
Remote control key - range Remote control key functions (in its basic ver- sion) have a range of approx. 20 metres from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade (p. 166).
If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I or II (p. 79) is active, and if all doors are closed, then a warning message is shown in the information display in the combined instrument panel and an audio reminder sig- nal sounds at the same time.
The message is extinguished and the audible reminder signal stops when the remote con- trol key is brought back to the car after either/or:
The remote control key has been inserted in the ignition switch.
Speed exceeds 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph).
the OK button has been pressed.
Related information Remote control key (p. 158)
Remote control key - functions (p. 162)
06 Locks and alarm
06
164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions A remote control key with PCC* has enhanced functionality compared with a remote control key in basic version (p. 158) in the form of an information button and indica- tor lamps.
Remote control key with PCC.
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indicator lamps.
Using the information button Press the information button .
> All indicator lamps flash for approxi- mately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC. This indicates that information from the car has been read.
If any of the other buttons are pressed during this time then the reading is interrupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illumi- nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Indicator lamps display information in accord- ance with the following illustration:
Green continuous light the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked.
Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indi- cator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.
Related information Remote control key with PCC* - range
(p. 165)
06 Locks and alarm
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165
Remote control key with PCC* - range The range of a remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator) for unlocking the doors and tailgate is approx. 20 metres from the car - the other functions are up to approx. 100 metres. If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The information button function may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
Out of range If the remote control key is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown, with- out the light travelling around on the remote control key.
If several remote control keys are used for the car then it is only the remote control key last used for locking/unlocking that shows the correct status.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illumi- nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information Keyless Drive* - range (p. 168)
Remote control key - range (p. 163)
Detachable key blade The remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec- ommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:
the left-hand front door can be unlocked manually (p. 166) if central locking can- not be activated with the remote control key.
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated/deactivated (p. 178).
the right-hand front door and the rear doors can be locked manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
the glovebox lock* can be unlocked.
the airbag for front passenger seat (PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated.
Related information Manual locking of the door (p. 173)
Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 175)
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat- ing* (p. 36)
06 Locks and alarm
06
166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade (p. 165) is carried out as follows:
Removing the key blade
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.
Attaching the key blade Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key (p. 158).
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
Related information Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
(p. 166)
Child safety locks - manual activation (p. 178)
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat- ing* (p. 36)
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors The detachable key blade can be used if the central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key - e.g. if the remote control key's battery (p. 167) has been discharged.
The left-hand front door can be opened as follows:
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the key blade in the door handle's lock cylin- der. For more information, see Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 171).
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch.
For cars with keyless start and lock system, see Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 171).
Related information Detachable key blade (p. 165)
Remote control key (p. 158)
06 Locks and alarm
06
}} 167
Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery The battery6 in the remote control key may need to be replaced.
The battery for the remote control key should be replaced if:
the information symbol is illuminated and the display in the combined instrument panel shows Car key battery low See manual
and/or
the locks repeatedly do not react to sig- nals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.
Opening Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole behind the spring-loaded catch and gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the bat- teries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.
Battery replacement
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.
Closely study how the battery/batteries are secured on the inside of the cover, with regard to their (+) and () sides.
Remote control key with one battery 1. Carefully prize out the battery. 2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
6 Remote control key with PCC has two batteries.
|| 06 Locks and alarm
06
168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Remote control key with PCC* with two batteries 1. Carefully prize out the batteries. 2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up. 3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.
Battery type Use batteries with designation CR2430, 3 V.
Assembly 1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.
Related information Remote control key (p. 158)
Remote control key - functions (p. 162)
Keyless drive* Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a star- ting and locking system that can be operated keylessly.
With the keyless start and lock system the car can be started, locked and unlocked without the remote control key (p. 158) inserted in the ignition switch7. It is enough to have the remote control key with you in a pocket. The system makes it easier and more convenient to e.g. open the car when your hands are full.
Both of the remote control keys included with the car have keyless functionality. It is possi- ble to order more remote control keys.
The car's electrical system can be set to three different levels - key position 0, I and II (p. 79) - with the remote control key.
Related information Keyless Drive* - range (p. 168)
Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the remote control key (p. 169)
Keyless Drive* - interference to remote control key function (p. 169)
Keyless Drive* - range9
In order to unlock the doors or tailgate auto- matically without pressing a button on the remote control key, a remote control key must be within approx. 1.5 metres from the car's door handle or tailgate.
The person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the remote control key with him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the remote control key is on the opposite side of the car.
The red rings in the above figure indicate the range covered by the system's antennas.
If all remote control keys are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I or II (p. 79) is active, and if a door has been opened and then closed, then a
7 Does not apply to Remote Control Key Basic. 9 Does not apply to cars with keyless starting
06 Locks and alarm
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169
warning message is shown in the information display in the combined instrument panel and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same time.
When the remote control key has been returned to the car, the warning message goes off and the audible reminder ceases once either/or:
a door has been opened and closed
the remote control key has been inserted in the ignition switch
The OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Related information Keyless drive* (p. 168)
Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 172)
Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the remote control key It is important to handle all remote control keys with great care.
If one of the remote control keys10 has been left in the car then the keyless functions are deactivated in case the car is e.g. locked with the other remote control key that belongs to the car. This prevents unauthorised entry.
The next time the car is unlocked with the other remote control key the forgotten remote control key is reactivated again.
IMPORTANT
Avoid leaving the remote control key with PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks into your car and takes the remote control key, it will e.g. be possible to start the car by pressing the remote control key in the ignition switch and then pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.
Related information Keyless drive* (p. 168)
Keyless Drive* - interference to remote control key function Electromagnetic fields and screening can interfere with the remote control key's keyless functions (p. 168).
NOTE
Do not place/store the remote control key with keyless function near a mobile phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the remote control key and the key blade like a remote control key in basic version (p. 158).
Related information Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 167)
Keyless Drive* - secure handling of the remote control key (p. 169)
Keyless Drive* - range (p. 168)
10 Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).
06 Locks and alarm
06
170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless Drive* - locking Cars equipped with keyless start and lock system have a touch-sensitive area on the outside handle of the doors and a rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubberised pres- sure plate.
Lock the doors and the tailgate by grasping one of the door handles or pressing the smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised but- tons - the lock indicator (p. 160) in the wind- screen confirms that locking has been com- pleted by starting to flash.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not locked.
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the gear selector must be set to the P position; otherwise the car can be neither locked nor alarmed.
Related information Keyless drive* (p. 168)
Alarm indicator (p. 181)
Keyless Drive* - unlocking12
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pres- sure plate is actuated - open the door or tail- gate as normal.
NOTE
The door handles normally register a hand that takes hold of the handle, but with thick gloves on or after a very quick hand movement a second attempt may be required, or with the glove taken off.
Related information Keyless drive* (p. 168)
Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 170)
12 Does not apply to remote control keys with keyless starting.
06 Locks and alarm
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the left-hand front door is unlocked with the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 165).
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's plastic cover must be removed - this is also done with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle/cover - do not prize. > The plastic cover loosens automati-
cally by means of the torque when the blade is pushed straight up and into the opening.
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cyl- inder and unlock the door.
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the left-hand front door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, this triggers the alarm (p. 180). It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see Alarm - remote control key not working (p. 182).
Related information Keyless drive* (p. 168)
Detachable key blade - detaching/attach- ing (p. 166)
Keyless Drive* - lock settings Lock settings for cars equipped with keyless start and lock system can be adapted by indi- cating in the menu system MY CAR which doors are to be unlocked.
For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information Keyless drive* (p. 168)
06 Locks and alarm
06
172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Keyless Drive* - antenna location Cars equipped with keyless start and lock system have a number of built-in antennas positioned at different locations in the car.
Rear bumper, centre
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.
Related information Keyless drive* (p. 168)
Locking/unlocking - from the outside Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried out using the remote control key (p. 162). The remote control key can lock/unlock all doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler flap. Different sequences for unlocking can be selected.
In order that the lock sequence can be acti- vated, the driver's door must be closed - if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated only when it/they are closed. For cars equipped with keyless locking system* all doors and the tailgate must be closed, see Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 170) and Keyless Drive* - unlocking (p. 170).
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be dis- charged - lock or unlock the left-hand front door with the detachable key blade (p. 166).
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.
06 Locks and alarm
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key - it is then not possible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls. For more information, see Deadlocks* (p. 177).
Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically. This function pre- vents the car from being left unlocked unin- tentionally. For cars with alarm, see Alarm (p. 180).
Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 174)
Remote control key - functions (p. 162)
Manual locking of the door In certain situations the car must be lockable manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 171).
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead have a lock switch on the end of each door which must be depressed using the key blade - they are then mechanically locked/ blocked to prevent them being opened from outside. The doors can still be opened from the inside.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with child safety locks (p. 178).
Remove the detachable key blade (p. 166) from the remote control key. Insert the key blade in the hole for lock reset and press the key in until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm.
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened.
The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock button on the remote control key (p. 158) or with the central locking button on the driver's door.
NOTE
A door's lock reset only locks that par- ticular door - not all doors simultane- ously.
A manually locked rear door with acti- vated manual child safety locks (p. 178) cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside. A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button.
Related information Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 167)
06 Locks and alarm
06
174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Locking/unlocking - from the inside Locking/unlocking can be performed using the driver's door button for central locking. All doors and tailgate (p. 175) can be locked or unlocked simultaneously.
Central locking
Press one side of the button to lock - the other side to unlock.
Lamp in lock button When the lamp in the central locking button for the driver's door is illuminated it means that all doors are locked.
With central locking button only in the driver's door, other doors have no button:
Illuminated lamp means that all doors are locked.
With central locking button on both front doors and electric lock button in each rear door:
Illuminated lamp means that only that particular door is locked. When all but- tons are illuminated all doors are locked.
Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways:
Press the central locking button .
A long press also opens all the side windows* simultaneously (see also section Global open- ing (p. 175)).
Pull the door handle and open the door - the door is unlocked and opened in one operation.
Locking Both front doors must be closed for the
central locking to be activated. Press the central locking button - all doors are locked. If any of the rear doors is open, it will lock when it is closed.
A long press also closes all the side windows simultaneously (see also section Global open- ing (p. 175)).
Automatic locking The doors and tailgate are locked automati- cally when the car starts to move.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 172)
Alarm (p. 180)
06 Locks and alarm
06
}} 175
Global opening The global opening function opens or closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.
Central locking button
A long press on the symbol in the central locking button or on the remote control key opens all side windows simultaneously. The same procedure on the button closes all side windows simultaneously.
Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 174)
Power windows (p. 103)
Locking/unlocking - glovebox The glovebox (p. 149) can only be locked/ unlocked using the detachable key blade from the remote control key (p. 158).
For information on the key blade, see Detach- able key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 166).
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position.
Pull out the key blade.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 162)
Locking/unlocking - tailgate The tailgate can be opened, locked and unlocked in a number of different ways.
Manual opening
Rubber plate with electrical contact.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. To open:
1. Push down gently on the wider of the two rubberised pressure plates under the outer handle - the lock is released.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate.
|| 06 Locks and alarm
06
176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel.
Do not place the lift force on the rub- ber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel.
Unlocking with the remote control key
Using the remote control key (p. 158) but- ton the alarm for the tailgate can be dis- armed* and the tailgate unlocked on its own.
The lock indicator (p. 160) on the instrument panel stops flashing in order to show that not all of the car is locked and the alarm's* level and movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.
The doors remain locked and armed.
The tailgate can be opened in two different ways using the remote control key:
One press - The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed - press lightly on the rubber- ised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Two presses (within 3 seconds) - The tail- gate is unlocked and the lock is disengaged at which point the tailgate opens about a cen- timetre - lift the outer handle to open. Rain, cold, frost or snow could however prevent the tailgate from disengaging from the lock.
NOTE
When the boot lid/tailgate is unlocked with 2 presses from the remote control key or from the car interior, automatic relocking does not take place because the boot lid/tailgate is open - it must be closed manually.
After the boot lid/tailgate has been closed it is unlocked and the alarm is not armed - relock it and re-arm the alarm with the remote control key's lock button .
Opening the car from inside
Unlocking, tailgate
To open the tailgate:
Press the lighting panel button (1). > The lock releases and the tailgate
opens by a few centimetres.
Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key (p. 162) but-
ton for locking . > The lock indicator on the instrument
panel starts flashing, which means that the car is locked and the alarm* has been activated.
Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside
(p. 174)
Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 172)
06 Locks and alarm
06
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177
Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is unlocked with the remote control key (p. 158) button for unlocking ( ).
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked until the car is locked with the remote control key's button for locking ( ). If the car is locked while driving or with the interior buttons then the fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The fuel filler flap's locking logic also follows the locking or unlocking of the keyless sys- tem and the central locking system.
Related information Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing (p. 298)
Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 299)
Deadlocks* Deadlocks13 means that all door handles are mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors being opened from the inside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key (p. 158) and are set after an approx. ten seconds delay after the doors have been locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked with the remote control key when the deadlocks function is activated. The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade (p. 165).
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Temporary deactivation
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
OK MENU
TUNE knob control
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off, which is carried out in the menu system MY CAR. For a detailed description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
In MY CAR one of the following options can be selected:
Activate once: - The combined instru- ment panel then shows Locks and alarm Reduced guard and deadlocks
13 Only in combination with alarm.
|| 06 Locks and alarm
06
178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
are switched off when the car is locked, only at this time. (Note that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off at the same time.)
During the next time the engine is started, the system is reset to zero and the combined instrument panel shows the message Locks and alarm Full guard at which the dead- locks and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are re-engaged.
Ask on exit: - Each time the engine is switched off, the driver must answer the question Activate Reduced Guard until engine has started again?.
If the deadlocks function shall be switched off
Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note that the alarm's movement and tilt detec- tors* are switched off at the same time.) > The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the com- bined instrument panel shows the message Locks and alarm Full guard at which the deadlocks function and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are re-engaged.
If the locking system shall not be changed
Press EXIT and lock the car.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.
The above applies if the deadlocks have not been deactivated temporarily.
Related information Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key
blade (p. 171)
Child safety locks - manual activation The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside.
The child safety locks are located on the trail- ing edge of the rear doors and are only acces- sible when the doors are open.
Activate/deactivate child safety locks
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with manual door lock (p. 173).
Use the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 166) to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from the inside.
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
06 Locks and alarm
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179
NOTE
A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.
Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock.
Related information Child safety locks - electrical activation*
(p. 179)
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 174)
Child safety locks - electrical activation* The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside.
Activation The electrical child safety locks can be acti- vated/deactivated in all key positions (p. 79) higher than 0. Activation/deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened.
Control panel driver's door.
1. Start the engine or choose a key position higher than 0.
2. Press the button in the driver's door con- trol panel. > The information display shows the
message Rear child lock activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active.
When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear:
windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started.
Related information Child safety locks - manual activation
(p. 178)
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 174)
06 Locks and alarm
06
180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Alarm The alarm is a device that warns in the event of e.g. a break-in in the car.
Activated alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)
the battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the information display in the combined instru- ment panel shows a message. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also regis- tered. For this reason the alarm is trig- gered if the car is left with a window open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window when leaving the car. If the car's integrated pas- senger compartment heater (or a portable electric heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger compartment. Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used, Reduced alarm level (p. 182).
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter compo- nents in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insurance.
Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton.
Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton or insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
Related information Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 181)
Alarm - remote control key not working (p. 182)
06 Locks and alarm
06
181
Alarm indicator The alarm indicator shows alarm system (p. 180) status.
Same LED as lock indicator (p. 160).
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:
LED not lit Alarm not armed
The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key position I is selected) Alarm has been triggered.
Alarm - automatic re-arming Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 180) pre- vents the car being left with the alarm dis- armed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (p. 158)(and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automati- cally re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Related information Alarm - automatic arming (p. 181)
Alarm - automatic arming In certain countries the alarm (p. 180) is acti- vated after a certain delay if the driver's door was opened and closed but the car was not re-locked.
Related information Alarm signals (p. 182)
06 Locks and alarm
06
182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Alarm - remote control key not working If the alarm (p. 180) cannot be deactivated with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery (p. 167) is discharged - the car can be unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the left-hand front door with the detachable key blade (p. 171). > The alarm is triggered, the direction
indicators flash and the siren sounds.
2. Insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch. > The alarm is deactivated.
Alarm signals When the alarm (p. 180) is triggered a siren sounds and all direction indicators flash.
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off. The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car battery.
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
Reduced alarm level Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt detectors can be temporarily deacti- vated.
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry - tempo- rarily deactivate the movement and tilt detec- tors.
The procedure is the same as with the tem- porary disengaging of deadlocks, see Dead- locks* (p. 177).
Related information Alarm (p. 180)
Alarm indicator (p. 181)
06 Locks and alarm
06
183
Type approval - remote control key system Type approval for the remote control key sys- tem can be read in the table.
Lock system, standard
Country/Area
EU, China
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country/Area
EU
Korea
Country/Area
China
Hong Kong
Related information Remote control key (p. 158)
DRIVER SUPPORT
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185
Electronic stability control (ESC) - general Stability system ESC (Electronic Stability Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.
The activation of the ESC system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
WARNING
The stability system ESC is supplementary assistance - it cannot handle all situations in all road conditions.
The driver always bears responsibility that the vehicle is driven safely and that appli- cable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.
The ESC system consists of the following functions:
Active Yaw Control
Spin Control
Traction control system
Engine drag control - EDC
Corner Traction Control - CTC
Driver Steering Recommendation DSR
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA
Active Yaw Control The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.
Spin Control The function reduces engine power if the drive wheels slip against the underlying sur- face in order to maintain stability and traction.
Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans- fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- ning to the one that is not.
Engine drag control - EDC EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun- tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gears on slippery road surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's abil- ity to steer the car.
Corner Traction Control - CTC CTC (Corner Traction Control) compensates for understeer and allows higher than normal acceleration in a bend without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly reach the prevailing traffic speed.
Driver Steering Recommendation DSR DSR (Driver Steering Recommendation) helps the driver steer the car in the right direction when there is reduced traction or when the ABS system engages.
The primary role of the DSR function is to help the driver steer in the right direction when the car is skidding.
DSR engages by applying slight torque to the steering wheel in the direction in which the car should be steered to maintain/achieve maximum possible traction and stabilise the car.
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1
Trailer stability assist (p. 311) function is to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake. For more information, see Driving with a trailer (p. 305).
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode.
Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera-
tion (p. 186)
Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym- bols and messages (p. 187)
1 Trailer Stability Assist is included in the installation of the Volvo genuine towbar.
07 Driver support
07
186
Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation
Selection of level - Sport mode The ESC system is always activated - it can- not be deactivated.
However, the driver can select the Sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experience.
In Sport mode the system detects whether the acceler-
ator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driv- ing and then allows controlled skidding with the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
If the driver stops a controlled skid by releas- ing the accelerator pedal, for example, then the ESC system intervenes and stabilises the car.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is also obtained if the car has become stuck, or when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep snow.
Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
Sport mode is selected in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu sys- tem, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Sport mode is indicated in the com- bined instrument panel by means of this symbol illuminating with a con- stant glow until the driver deselects
the function or until the engine is switched off - after the next time the engine is started the ESC system is back in its normal mode once again.
Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 185)
Electronic stability control (ESC) - sym- bols and messages (p. 187)
MY CAR (p. 112)
07 Driver support
07
}} 187
Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols and messages
Table
Symbol Message Specification
ESC Temporarily OFF ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
ESC Service required ESC system disengaged.
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
and
"Message" There is a message in the combined instrument panel - read it!
Constant glow for 2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow. Sport mode is activated.
NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode - it is partially reduced.
|| 07 Driver support
07
188
Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 185)
Electronic stability control (ESC) - opera- tion (p. 186)
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189
Road Sign Information (RSI) The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which road signs the car has passed.
Examples of readable speed related2 signs.
The road sign information function gives information on current speed, that a motor- way or road is starting/ending and when overtaking is prohibited. If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to show the sign symbol for maximum permitted speed.
WARNING
RSI does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.
Related information Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 189)
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations (p. 191)
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which road signs the car has passed. How the function is operated is described below.
Recorded speed information3.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an imposed speed, the combined instrument panel displays the sign as a symbol.
Together with the symbol for the current speed limit, a sign showing that overtaking is prohibited may also be displayed where appropriate.
2 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations only show a few examples. 3 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations only show a few examples.
|| 07 Driver support
07
190
End of restriction or motorway A corresponding road sign is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI detects a sign that involves the end of a speed limit - or other speed-related informa- tion, e.g. end of a motorway.
Examples of such signs are:
End of all restrictions.
End of motorway.
Following which, the sign information is hid- den until the next speed-related sign is detected.
Additional signs
Examples of additional signs3.
Sometimes different speed limits are signpos- ted for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
The speed applicable on an exit is indicated in certain markets by means of an additional sign containing an arrow.
Speed signs linked to this type of additional sign are displayed only if the driver is using the direction indicator.
Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a specific dis- tance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to the situation by means of a symbol for an additional sign under the
symbol showing speed.
Display of additional information A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the combined instrument panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has detected an additional sign with supplementary
information for the current speed limit.
Road sign information On/Off
The combined instrument panel's speed sym- bol display can be disabled.
3 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations only show a few examples.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191
To deactivate the RSI function:
Search for the function in the menu sys- tem MY CAR MY CAR (p. 112), uncheck Road sign information and back out with EXIT.
Speed Alert On/Off
The driver can opt to receive a warning when the applicable speed limit is exceeded by 5 km/h (3 mph) or more. This warning is given by the symbol showing the applicable maxi- mum speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded.
To activate speed warning:
Search for the function in the menu sys- tem MY CAR MY CAR (p. 112), check Speed alert and back out with EXIT.
Related information Road Sign Information (RSI) (p. 189)
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations (p. 191)
MY CAR (p. 112)
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which road signs the car has passed. The function has the following limita- tions.
The RSI function's camera sensor has limita- tions just like the human eye. Find out more about this in the section on the camera sen- sor limitations (p. 231).
Signs which indirectly provide information on a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI function.
Here are some other examples of what can disrupt the function:
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Concealed or poorly positioned signs
Signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt.
Related information Road Sign Information (RSI) (p. 189)
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation (p. 189)
Speed limiter* A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel Digital and Analogue.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed
Speed limiter active
|| 07 Driver support
07
192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Related information Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 192)
Speed limiter - temporary deactivation and standby mode* (p. 193)
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee- ded (p. 194)
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 195)
Speed limiter* - getting started A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel Digital and Analogue.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed
Speed limiter active
Switch on and activate When the speed limiter is active, its symbol (6) is shown in combination with a mark (5) by the set maximum speed in the combined instrument panel.
Selection and storage of the highest possible speed in the memory can be made both dur- ing a journey and while stationary.
While driving 1. Press the steering wheel button to
switch on the speed limiter. > The symbol (6) for speed limiter illumi-
nates in the combined instrument panel.
2. When the car is moving at the desired highest possible speed: Press one of the steering wheel buttons or until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5) next to the desired maximum speed. > The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the memory.
When stationary 1. Press the steering wheel button to
switch on the speed limiter.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193
2. Scroll with the button until the com- bined instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the desired maximum speed. > The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the memory.
Related information Speed limiter* (p. 191)
Speed limiter* - changing speed
Changing the stored speed Stored max. speed is changed with short or long presses on the or steering wheel button.
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):
Use short presses - each press gives +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):
Hold down the button and release it at the required max. speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
Related information Speed limiter* (p. 191)
Speed limiter - temporary deactivation and standby mode* A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar- ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Steering wheel keypad and instrument panel Dig- ital and Analogue.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
Selected speed
Speed limiter active
|| 07 Driver support
07
194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode:
Press . > The combined instrument panel's
mark (5) changes colour from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or from WHITE to GREY (Analogue) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed.
The speed limiter is reactivated with one press on . The mark (5) then changes colour from WHITE to GREEN (Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue) and the car's maximum speed is lim- ited again.
Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter can also be set in standby mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rap- idly accelerating the car out of a situation:
Depress the accelerator pedal fully. > The combined instrument panel shows
the stored maximum speed with a col- oured mark (5) and the driver can tem- porarily exceed the set maximum speed the mark (5) changes colour from GREEN to WHITE (Digital) or WHITE to GREY (Analogue) during that time.
The speed limiter is automatically reac- tivated after the accelerator pedal is released and the car's speed is slowed down to below the selected/stored maximum speed - the mark (5) changes colour from WHITE to GREEN (Digital) or GREY to WHITE (Analogue) and the car's maximum speed is again limited.
Related information Speed limiter* (p. 191)
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar- ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
On steep roads the speed limiter's engine braking effect may be inadequate and the selected maximum speed is exceeded. The driver is alerted about this with an acoustic signal. The signal is active until the driver has slowed to below the selected maximum speed.
NOTE
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h (approx. 2 mph), provided that nei- ther of the or buttons has been depressed during the last half minute.
Related information Speed limiter* (p. 191)
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195
Speed limiter* - deactivation A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.
To deactivate the speed limiter:
Press the steering wheel button . > The combined instrument panel's
(p. 191) symbol for the speed limiter and the mark for the set speed are extinguished. The selected and stored speed are thus deleted from the mem- ory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
The driver can then use the accelerator pedal to choose a speed without limi- tation.
Related information Speed limiter* (p. 191)
Cruise control* The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in more relaxing driving on motorways and long, straight roads with regular traffic flows.
Overview
The steering wheel buttons and combined instru- ment panel in cars without speed limiter4.
The steering wheel buttons and combined instru- ment panel in cars with speed limiter4.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol (GREY = Standby mode).
4 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
|| 07 Driver support
07
196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter- vene when the cruise control is not main- taining a suitable speed and/or suitable distance.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Related information Cruise control* - managing speed
(p. 196)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 197)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 198)
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Cruise control* - managing speed It is possible to activate, set and change the stored speed.
Activating and setting the speed
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter5.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter5.
To start the cruise control:
Press the steering wheel button for CRUISE (without speed limiter) or (with speed limiter).
> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com- bined instrument panel illuminates - Cruise control is in standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
At the required speed - press the steering wheel button or .
> The current speed is stored in the mem- ory and the combined instrument panel's marking (5) illuminates at the selected speed and the symbol (6) changes from GREY to WHITE - the car then follows the stored speed.
5 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph).
Changing the stored speed Stored speed is changed with short or long presses on the or steering wheel but- ton.
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):
Use short presses - each press gives +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):
Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal prior to pressing the / button, then it is the car's current speed when the button is pressed that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.
Related information Cruise control* (p. 195)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode The function can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter6.
6 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
|| 07 Driver support
07
198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter6.
To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode:
Press .
> The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from WHITE to GREY - Cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
Standby mode due to driver intervention Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set automatically in standby mode if:
the foot brake is used
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute7
the gear lever/selector is moved to N position
the driver maintains speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:
wheels lose traction
engine speed is too low/high
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Related information Cruise control* (p. 195)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 196)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 198)
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)
Cruise control* - resume set speed The cruise control (p. 195) (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed.
After temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 197) it is possible to resume the set speed.
6 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market. 7 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter8.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter8.
To reactivate the cruise control from standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button .
> The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from GREY to WHITE - the car then fol- lows the last stored speed.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Related information Cruise control* (p. 195)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 196)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 197)
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 199)
Cruise control* - deactivate
How it is deactivated is described here.
8 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
|| 07 Driver support
07
200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars without speed limiter9.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars with speed limiter9.
The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button (1) or by switching off the engine - the stored speed is deleted from
the memory and cannot be resumed with the button.
Related information Cruise control* (p. 195)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 196)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 197)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 198)
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed combined with a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
The adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows.
The driver sets the desired speed (p. 204) and time interval to the car in front. When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is warned instead by a Distance Alert (p. 215) about the short distance.
9 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter- vene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- ble distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used.
The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise con- trol is being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Automatic gearbox Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced functionality with the adaptive cruise control's Queue assistance (p. 207) function.
Related information Adaptive cruise control* - function
(p. 201)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval (p. 205)
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 206)
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle (p. 207)
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 207)
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assis- tance (p. 207)
Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality (p. 209)
Radar sensor (p. 210)
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 210)
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action (p. 212)
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 213)
Adaptive cruise control* - function
Function overview10.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel (p. 85) keypad
Radar sensor (p. 210)
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing system.
10 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
|| 07 Driver support
07
202
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehi- cle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy- cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly measured by a radar sensor. The cruise con- trol function regulates the speed with acceler- ation and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used by the adaptive cruise control.
WARNING
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath the brake pedal - it may then become trapped.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane according to what the driver set for time interval (p. 205). If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the stored speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies with large differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor (p. 210) braking may come unexpect- edly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h11 (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). If the speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph) or if the engine speed becomes too low, the cruise control is set in standby mode at which automatic braking ceases - the driver must then take over himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle in front.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to approx. 40% of the car's braking capacity.
1. Collision warning system warning lamp and warning sound12.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise control capacity and the driver does not brake, then the warning lamp and warning sound from the Collision warning system (p. 225) are used in order to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.
11 Queue Assist (p. 207) in cars with automatic gearbox can operate in the range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph). 12 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to see in strong sunlight or when wearing sun- glasses.
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles which the radar sensor has detected. Hence the warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a warning without braking when so required.
Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes, with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to slow down.
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview Operation of the adaptive cruise control (p. 200) and steering wheel keypad varies depending on whether or not the car is equip- ped with speed limiter (p. 191)13.
Adaptive cruise control with Speed limiter
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).
Adaptive cruise control without Speed limiter
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
(Not used)
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).
13 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
|| 07 Driver support
07
204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval (p. 205)
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 206)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed
To start the ACC:
Press the steering wheel button - a similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel (8) which shows that the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode (p. 206).
To activate ACC:
At the required speed - press the steering wheel button or .
> The current speed is stored in the mem- ory, the combined instrument panel shows a "magnifying glass" (6) around the stored speed for a second or so and its marking changes from WHITE to GREEN.
When this symbol changes colour from WHITE to GREEN, ACC is active and the car maintains the
stored speed.
Only when the symbol shows an image of another vehicle is the distance to the vehicle in front controlled by ACC.
At the same time a speed range is marked:
the higher speed with GREEN marking is the pre-programmed speed
the lower speed is the speed of the vehi- cle in front.
Changing the stored speed Stored speed is changed with short or long presses on the or steering wheel but- ton.
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):
Use short presses - each press gives +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):
Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal prior to pressing the / button, then it is the car's current speed when the button is pressed that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205
stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
NOTE
If any of the adaptive cruise control but- tons are held depressed for several minutes then the function is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate it, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.
In certain situations it cannot be reactiva- ted - in which case, the combined instru- ment panel (p. 213) shows Adaptive cruise control unavailable.
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre-
sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.
To set/change the time distance:
Turn the steering wheel button set's thumbwheel (or use the / buttons for cars without Speed limiters).
At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably.
Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Dis- tance Alert (p. 215) is activated.
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.
If the adaptive cruise control does not appear to react when activated, this may be because the time distance to the vehi- cle in front is preventing an increase in speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a given time interval.
Read more how speed is handled (p. 204).
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
07 Driver support
07
206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode The adaptive cruise control can be temporar- ily deactivated and set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation/standby mode - with speed limiter To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button
This symbol and stored speed mark- ing then changes colour from GREEN to WHITE.
Temporary deactivation/standby mode - without speed limiter To temporarily disengage adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button
Standby mode due to driver intervention The adaptive cruise control is temporarily dis- engaged and set automatically in standby mode if:
the foot brake is used
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute14
the gear selector is moved to N position (automatic gearbox)
the driver maintains speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accel- erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
For more information, see the sections Man- aging speed (p. 204) and Overtaking another vehicle (p. 207).
Automatic standby mode The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC (p. 185). If any of these systems stops work- ing, the adaptive cruise control is deactivated automatically.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Adaptive cruise control cancelled is shown in the combined instrument panel. The driver must then inter- vene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off his seatbelt
engine speed is too low/high
speed has fallen below 30 km/h15
(20 mph)
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
For more information on symbols, messages and their meaning, see section Symbols and messages in the display (p. 213).
Resume set speed Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reactivated with one press on the steering wheel button - the speed is then set to the last stored speed.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
14 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode. 15 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assist - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle ACC can also assist during overtaking.
When the car is following another vehicle and the driver indicates an impending overtaking manoeuvre with the direction indicator16, the adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accel- erate the car towards the vehicle in front.
The function is active at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph).
Read more about the different time inter- vals (p. 205) to the vehicle in front.
Read more about how you manage the speed (p. 204).
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be acti- vated in more situations other than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road - the car will then acceler- ate briefly.
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
Keypad with Speed limiter The adaptive cruise control is disengaged with a short press of the steering wheel but- ton . The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the button.
Keypad without Speed limiter A short press on the steering wheel button
sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode. With a further short press it is deacti- vated. The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the button.
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assistance Queue assistance also provides the adaptive cruise control with enhanced functionality at speeds lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control is supplemented with the queue assistance function (also referred to as "Queue Assist").
Queue assistance has the following functions:
Extended speed range - also at lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) and at stationary
Change of target
Automatic braking ceases when station- ary
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though the cruise control is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a lower speed cannot be selected.
Learn more about how you manage the speed (p. 200) and different time intervals to the vehicle in front (p. 205).
16 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
|| 07 Driver support
07
208
Extended speed range
NOTE
In order to activate the cruise control the driver's door must be closed and the driver must be wearing the seatbelt.
With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).
NOTE
Activation of the cruise control below 30 km/h (20 mph) requires a vehicle in front within a reasonable distance.
For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the cruise control is set in standby mode (p. 206) with automatic braking. The driver must then reactivate it in one of the following ways:
Press the steering wheel button .
or
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The cruise control will then resume fol- lowing the vehicle in front.
NOTE
The Queue Assist function can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes release.
See more information under the heading "Termination of automatic braking at a standstill".
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front.
When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will brake for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When the adaptive cruise control is follow- ing a vehicle in front at speeds in excess of 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a vehicle in front to a sta- tionary vehicle, the cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored speed.
The driver must intervene him/herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of target The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode:
when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph) and the cruise control is uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph) and the vehicle in front turns off so the cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Termination of automatic braking at a standstill In the following situations, queue assistance stops automatic braking at a standstill:
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off his seatbelt.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209
This means that the brakes are released and the car will start to roll - the driver must there- fore intervene and brake the car himself in order to maintain its position.
IMPORTANT
Queue Assist can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the brakes release.
The driver's attention is drawn to this over several stages, with increasing intensity:
1. Acoustic alarm (pinging) and text mes- sage.
2. A warning lamp in the windscreen also starts to flash.
3. "Stabbing" braking occurs. For more information on symbols, mes- sages and their meaning, see the section Symbols and messages in the dis- play (p. 213).
Queue assistance releases the foot brake and is set to standby mode in these situations as well:
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R position
the driver sets the cruise control in standby mode
the parking brake is applied.
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality
Changing from ACC to CC A symbol for active cruise control is shown in the combined instrument panel:
CC
Cruise Control
ACC
Adaptive Cruise Control
Cruise control Adaptive cruise control
With one press of the button the adaptive ele- ment (spacing system) in the adaptive cruise control (p. 200) is deactivated, at which point the car only follows the set/stored speed.
Hold down the steering wheel button - the combined instrument panel's sym- bol changes from to .
> This activates Cruise Control CC.
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically after switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows the set speed.
|| 07 Driver support
07
210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Changing back from CC to ACC Switch off the cruise control (CC) with 1-2 presses on the button. The next time the system is switched on it is the adaptive cruise control (ACC) that is activated.
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 206)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
Radar sensor The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the same lane.
The radar sensor is used by the following functions:
Distance Warning*
Adaptive cruise control*
Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedestrian Detection*
IMPORTANT
In the event of visible damage to the car's grille, or if you suspect that the radar sen- sor may be damaged:
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The function may completely or partially disappear - or malfunction - if the grille, the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged or has loosened.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in it being illegal to use.
Related information Radar sensor - limitations (p. 210)
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Collision warning system* (p. 225)
Distance Warning* (p. 215)
Radar sensor - limitations A radar sensor (p. 210) has certain limitations - due to its limited field of vision for example.
The capacity of the adaptive cruise control to detect a vehicle in front is significantly reduced if:
the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- cantly different from your own speed
its radar sensor becomes blocked - e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sen- sor.
NOTE
Keep the surface in front of the radar sen- sor clean.
Field of vision The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211
ACC field of vision.
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the car and vehicles in front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and inter- vene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suita- ble distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used.
The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise con- trol is being used.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxil- iary lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- vene if the system does not detect a vehi- cle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcy- cles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Collision warning system* (p. 225)
Distance Warning* (p. 215)
07 Driver support
07
212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action
If the combined instrument panel shows the message Radar blocked See manual then it means that the adaptive cruise control's radar
sensor (p. 210) cannot detect other vehicles in front of the car.
This message indicates that neither of the functions for Distance Alert (p. 215) or Colli-
sion Warning with Auto Brake (p. 225) are working.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action:
Cause Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked.
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may display a symbol and/or text message. Here
are some examples - follow the recommenda- tion given if appropriate:
SymbolA Message Specification
The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode (p. 206).
The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
Set ESC to Normal to ena- ble Cruise
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until ESC has been set in Normal mode - Stability system (p. 185).
Adaptive cruise control cancelled
The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
Adaptive cruise control unavailable
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
For more information about fault tracing, see section Fault tracing and action (p. 212)
Radar blocked See manual The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to normal Cruise control (p. 195) (CC) - a text message pro- vides information on appropriate alternatives.
Read more about radar sensor limitations (p. 210).
|| 07 Driver support
07
214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
SymbolA Message Specification
Adaptive cruise control Service required
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Press brake to hold vehicle + acoustic alarm + warning light in windscreen + "pulling" brakesB
The car is at a standstill and the adaptive cruise control will release the foot brake, which is why the car may start rolling soon.
The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
Below 30 km/h Lead vehi- cle requiredB
Shown in the event of attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) without a vehicle in front within the activation distance.
A The symbols are schematic. B Only with Queue Assist.
Related information Adaptive cruise control (ACC)* (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 203)
Cruise control* (p. 195)
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215
Distance Warning* The Distance Warning function (Distance Alert) warns the driver if the time interval to the vehicle ahead becomes too short.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car, in the same direc- tion. No distance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.
Orange-coloured warning lamp17.
An orange-coloured warning lamp in the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the dis- tance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.
Operation
Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Some combinations of the selected equip- ment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case, the func-
tion is operated in the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 112) - once there, search for the Distance Alert function.
Set time interval
Controls and symbol for time interval.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On.
Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre-
sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 sec- onds.
17 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
|| 07 Driver support
07
216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The same symbol is also shown when adap- tive cruise control (p. 200) is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calcu- lated distance in metres for a given time interval.
The set time interval is also used by the function adaptive cruise control (p. 201).
Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.
Related information Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 216)
Distance Warning* - symbols and mes- sages (p. 217)
Distance Warning* - limitations
This function, which uses the same radar sensor as Adaptive cruise control (p. 200) and Collision warning with auto brake (p. 225), has certain limitations.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illumi- nates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range.
For further information on radar sensor limita- tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 210) and Collision warning system* - operation (p. 229).
Related information Distance Warning* (p. 215)
Distance Warning* - symbols and mes- sages (p. 217)
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages
The function has certain symbols and mes- sages that can be shown in the combined
instrument panel if the function is reduced due to its limitations (p. 216).
SymbolA Message Specification
Radar blocked See manual
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
Radar sensor (p. 210) is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
For information, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 210).
Collision warning Service required
Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 230) fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A The symbols are schematic.
07 Driver support
07
218 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
City Safety City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
The City Safety function is active at speeds below 50 km/h (30 mph) and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent risk of collision with vehi- cles in front, should the driver not react in time by braking and/or steering away.
City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
City Safety must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on City Safety to do the braking, there might be a risk of a colli- sion sooner or later.
The driver or passengers normally only notice City Safety if a situation arises where the car is extremely close to being in a collision.
If the car is also equipped with Collision Warning with Auto Brake* (p. 225) these two systems complement each other.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be per- formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
City Safety does not engage in all driv- ing situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.
City Safety does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car, to small vehicles and motorcycles or to people and animals.
City Safety can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) - at a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain full brake function, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
Never wait for City Safety to engage. The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the proper distance and speed.
Related information City Safety - limitations (p. 220)
City Safety - function (p. 218)
City Safety - operation (p. 219)
City Safety - laser sensor (p. 222)
City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 224)
City Safety - function City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car with a laser sensor (p. 222) fitted in the top edge of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of collision, City Safety will automatically brake the car, which may be experienced as heavy braking.
07 Driver support
07
}} 219
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window18.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h (3-9 mph) in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety can completely avoid a collision.
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking and stops the car in normal circumstances, just behind the vehicle in front. For most dri- vers this is well outside normal driving style and may be experienced as being uncomfort- able.
If the difference in speed between the vehi- cles is greater than 15 km/h (9 mph) then City Safety may not avoid the collision on its own - to obtain full brake force, the driver must depress the brake pedal and this could then make it possible to avoid a collision, even at speed differences above 15 km/h (9 mph).
When the function is activated and brakes, the combined instrument panel shows a mes- sage (p. 224) to the effect that the function is/has been active.
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on.
Related information City Safety (p. 218)
City Safety - operation (p. 219)
City Safety - limitations (p. 220)
City Safety - operation City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
On and Off
NOTE
The City Safety function is activated automatically when the engine is started.
In certain situations, it may advisable to disa- ble City Safety, e.g. where leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet and/or wind- screen.
City Safety handled in the menu system MY CAR (p. 112) and after starting the engine the function can be deactivated as follows:
Search in MY CAR for Driver support system and select the Off option at City Safety.
However, the function will be enabled the next time the engine is started, regardless of whether the system was enabled or disabled when the engine was switched off.
18 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
|| 07 Driver support
07
220
WARNING
The laser sensor (p. 222) emits laser light even when City Safety is disabled man- ually.
To enable City Safety again:
Follow the same procedure as for disa- bling, but select the On option.
Related information City Safety (p. 218)
City Safety - limitations (p. 220)
City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 224)
City Safety - limitations The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect cars and other large vehicles in front of the car irrespective of whether it is day or night.
However, the function does have some limita- tions.
The sensor's limitations mean that City Safety has poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or white-out situations. Misting, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may also disrupt the function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxili- ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.
The laser light from the sensor in City Safety measures how the light is reflected. The sensor cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity. The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate and rear light reflectors.
On slippery road surfaces the braking dis- tance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS19 and ESC20 sys-
tems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated.
City Safety is not activated at low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph), which is why the sys- tem does not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front is being approached very slowly, e.g. when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering or accelerating in a clear manner, even if a colli- sion is unavoidable.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov- ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when City Safety has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
19 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system. 20 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.
07 Driver support
07
221
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor (p. 222) free from ice, snow and dirt. For an illustration of sensor location, see City Safety - function (p. 218).
Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet - snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm.
Fault tracing and action If the message (p. 224) Windscreen sensors blocked See manual is shown in the combined instrument panel it indicates that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the car. This means that City Safety is not operational.
The Windscreen sensors blocked See manual message is not shown for all situa- tions in which the laser sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor clean.
The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown, along with suggestions for appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen sur- face in front of the laser sensor is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the sensor from dirt, ice and snow.
The laser sensor field of vision is blocked.
Remove the blocking object.
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), then a workshop must be con- tacted for replacement of the windscreen - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended. For an illustration of sensor loca- tion, see City Safety - function (p. 218).
Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation for City Safety, the following also applies:
Volvo recommends that you do not repair cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the laser sensor - instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced.
Before replacing a windscreen, con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted.
The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted dur- ing replacement.
Related information City Safety (p. 218)
City Safety - function (p. 218)
City Safety - operation (p. 219)
07 Driver support
07
222
City Safety - laser sensor The City Safety function includes a sensor which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. It is absolutely essential to follow the prescribed instructions when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels relate to the laser sensor:
The upper label in the figure describes the laser beam's classification:
Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser beam with optical instruments - Class 1M laser product.
The lower label in the figure describes the laser beam's physical data:
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)
standards for laser product design with the exception of deviations in accordance with "Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
Radiation data for the laser sensor The following table specifies the laser sen- sor's physical data.
Maximum pulse energy 2.64 J
Maximum average output 45 mW
Pulse duration 33 ns
Divergence (horizontal x verti- cal)
28 12
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury!
Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radia- tion) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a mag- nifying glass, microscope, lens or simi- lar optical instruments.
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment and/or replacement of the laser sen- sor's spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop - we rec- ommend an authorised Volvo work- shop.
To avoid exposure to harmful radia- tion, do not carry out any readjust- ments or maintenance other than those specified here.
The repairer must follow specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor.
Do not remove the laser sensor (this includes removing the lenses). A removed laser sensor fulfils laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore entails a risk of injury.
The laser sensor's connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen.
07 Driver support
07
223
The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor's connector is plugged in.
The laser sensor transmits a laser light when the remote control key is in key position II (p. 79) even if the engine is switched off.
Related information City Safety (p. 218)
07 Driver support
07
224
City Safety - symbols and messages In conjunction with automatic braking by the City Safety (p. 218) system, one or more
symbols (p. 224) may illuminate in the com- bined instrument panel and a text message may be shown. A text message can be
acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK but- ton on the direction indicator stalk.
SymbolA Message Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the laser sensor's limitations.
City Safety Service required City Safety is not operational.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A The symbols are schematic.
Related information City Safety (p. 218)
City Safety - function (p. 218)
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225
Collision warning system* "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of collid- ing with a pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" can pre- vent a collision or reduce collision speed.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking, there might be a risk of a colli- sion sooner or later.
Two system levels Depending on how the car is equipped, the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" function may appear in two variants:
Level 1 The driver is merely warned21 of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the driver must himself brake.
Level 2 The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is braked automatically if the driver him- self does not act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of the internal components of the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Related information Collision warning system* - function
(p. 226)
Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 228)
Collision warning system* - detection of cyclists (p. 227)
Collision warning system* - operation (p. 229)
Collision warning system* - limitations (p. 230)
Collision warning system* - camera sen- sor limitations (p. 231)
Collision warning system* - symbols and messages (p. 233)
21 No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".
07 Driver support
07
226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Collision warning system* - function
Function overview22.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk.
Radar sensor23
Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes three steps in the following order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support23
3. Auto Brake23
The collision warning system and City Safety (p. 218) complement each other.
1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.
The collision warning system can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are sta- tionary or moving in the same direction in front of the driver's vehicle.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian, cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention is attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1) and an acoustic signal.
2 - Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake sup- port is activated.
This means that the brake system is prepared for rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is imple- mented.
Brake support also reinforces the driver's braking if the system considers that the brak- ing is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
3 - Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic brak- ing function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.
22 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 23 With system Level 2 only.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227
WARNING
The collision warning system does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles or cyclists driving in another direction to the car or to animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. This section "Func- tion" and the section "Limitations" inform about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the Collision Warn- ing system with Auto Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph).
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists do not work in darkness and tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a col- lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure full brake performance, the driver should always depress the brake pedal - even when the car auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The driver is always responsible that the cor- rect distance and speed are maintained - even when the collision warning system with auto-brake is used.
Related information Collision warning system* (p. 225)
Collision warning system* - detection of cyclists
The function only "sees" cyclists from behind, who are travelling in the same direction.
Optimal example of what the system interprets as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle con-
tours, directly from behind and in the car's cen- tre line.
Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects a cyclist receives as unambiguous information as pos- sible about the body and bicycle contours - this implies the opportunity to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist.
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and rid- ing an "adult bicycle".
The function can only detect cyclists directly from behind and who are travel- ling in the same direction - not at an angle from behind, not from the side.
The bicycle must be equipped with a highly visible and approved24 rearward- facing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm above the roadway.
Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand edge of the car's imagined/extended side lines may be detected late or not at all.
The function's capacity to detect cyclists at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.
24 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.
|| 07 Driver support
07
228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The function's capacity to detect cyclists is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
For optimum bicycle detection, the City Safety function must be activated, see City Safety (p. 218).
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.
The function cannot detect:
all cyclists in all situations and does not see partially obscured cyclists, for example.
cyclists in clothing that obscures the contours of the body or who are approaching from the side.
bicycles that have no rearward-facing red reflector.
bicycles loaded with large objects. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
Related information Collision warning system* (p. 225)
Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects pedes- trians receives as unambiguous information as possible about the contours of the body - this implies the opportunity to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.
If large parts of the body are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a pedestrian.
In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/she must appear full-length and have a height of at least 80 cm.
The camera sensor's ability to see pedes- trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.
The camera sensor's capacity to detect pedestrians is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when street- lights are lit.
WARNING
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is a means of assistance. The function cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and does not see, for example:
partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides their body con- tour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
pedestrians who are carrying larger objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
Related information Collision warning system* (p. 225)
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229
Collision warning system* - operation
Settings for the collision warning system are made from MY CAR via the centre console screen and menu system, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Warning signals On and Off
1. Acoustic and visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk25.
It is possible to select whether the collision warning system's acoustic and visual warning signals should be switched on or off.
When starting the engine, the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake func- tions are always activated - they cannot be deactivated.
Settings for the collision warning system are made via the centre console's screen and the menu system MY CAR, see (p. 112).
Light and acoustic signals When the collision warning system's light and acoustic warnings are activated, the warning lamp (no. [1] in previous illustration) is tested each time the engine is started by briefly illu- minating the warning lamp's separate points of light.
After starting the engine, both light and acoustic signals are switched off:
Search for Collision warning in Driver support system in the menu system MY CAR (p. 112) - and there select to uncheck the function.
Audible signal After starting the engine the warning sound can be activated/deactivated separately:
Search for Warning sound in Collision warning in the menu system MY CAR (p. 112) - and there select On or Off.
Following which, the collision warning system is only indicated with a light signal.
Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are deployed.
Search for Warning distance in Collision warning in the menu system MY CAR (p. 112) - and there select Long, Normal or Short.
The warning distance determines the sys- tem's sensitivity. Warning distance Long pro- vides an earlier warning. First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warn- ings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, then change to warning distance Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in excep- tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the collision warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.
In order for the collision warning system to be effective, always drive with Distance Alert (p. 215) set at time interval 45.
25 The illustration is schematic - car model and details may differ.
|| 07 Driver support
07
230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set to Long warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee 100 % correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake by driving at people or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.
Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the centre console display screen.
Search in the menu system MY CAR (p. 112) for Collision warning in Driver support system.
Maintenance
Camera and radar sensor26.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car sham- poo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
Related information Collision warning system* (p. 225)
Collision warning system* - limitations The function has certain limitations - for example, it is not active until 4 km/h (3 mph).
The collision warning system's visual warning signal may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warning sound should therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking dis- tance is extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision. In such situa- tions the ABS and ESC (p. 185) systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporar- ily disengaged in the event of high passen- ger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.
Warnings may not appear if the dis- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal move- ments are large, e.g. a very active driv- ing style.
26 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists27 - the system can give effective warnings and brake interventions for them at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h (43 mph).
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles could be disengaged due to dark- ness or poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as the adaptive cruise control (p. 200).
If warnings are perceived as being too fre- quent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced. This then leads to the sys- tem providing a warning at a later stage, which reduces the total number of warnings;
see Collision warning system - operation (p. 229).
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is tempo- rarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- vated at low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph), which is why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
In situations where the driver demonstrates active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warning may be postponed slightly in order to keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is mov- ing, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
Related information Collision warning system* (p. 225)
Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations The function uses the car's camera sensor, which has certain limitations.
The cars camera sensor is also used - as well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the functions:
Active main beam (p. 90)
Road sign information (p. 189)
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 234)
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 237).
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example. Under such conditions the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
27 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.
|| 07 Driver support
07
232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce camera sensor function when it is used to scan the carriage- way and detect pedestrians and other vehi- cles.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is lim- ited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles cannot be detected in some situa- tions, or they are detected later than anticipa- ted.
During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road markings in front of the car.
At the same time, this means that - besides Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the fol- lowing functions will not have full functionality either:
Active main beam
Driver Alert Control
Lane Keeping Aid
Road sign information
The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action.
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the camera from dirt, ice and snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain or snow means that the camera does not work suffi- ciently well.
No action. At times the camera does not work during heavy rain or snow- fall.
The windscreen surface in front of the camera has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It may take several minutes for the camera to measure the visibil- ity.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera.
Visit a workshop to have the wind- screen inside the camera cover cleaned - an author- ised Volvo work- shop is recom- mended.
Related information Collision warning system* (p. 225)
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233
Collision warning system* - symbols and messages
SymbolA Message Specification
Collision warning sys- tem OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warning sys- tem Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto Braking was acti- vated
Auto Brake has been active.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
Camera sensor (p. 231) is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Radar blocked See manual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
Radar sensor (p. 210) is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Collision warning Serv- ice required
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information Collision warning system* (p. 225)
07 Driver support
07
234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Driver Alert System* The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of different functions which can either be switched on at the same time or individually:
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 235).
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 239).
A switched-on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph).
The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km/h (37 mph).
The functions use a camera which is depend- ent on the lane having side markings painted on each side.
WARNING
Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a sup- plementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Related information Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 234)
Lane assistance* (p. 237)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* DAC is intended to attract the driver's atten- tion when he/she starts to drive less consis- tently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads.
A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver's steering wheel movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly.
In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue. In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver. For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of
driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a period of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals, and make sure you are well rested.
Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warn- ing despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
DAC is not intended for city traffic.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 231).
Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 234)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 235)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages (p. 236)
Lane assistance* (p. 237)
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation Settings are made from the centre console display screen and its menu system.
On/Off The Driver Alert function can be set in standby mode via the menu system MY CAR (p. 112):
Checked box - function activated.
Unchecked box - the function is deacti- vated.
Function Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as the speed is above 60 km/h (37 mph).
If the vehicle is being driven errati- cally, the driver is notified by an acoustic signal plus the text mes- sage (p. 236) Driver Alert Time for
a break - the linked symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel at the same time. The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.
Studies have shown that it is equally as dangerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.
Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 234)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 234)
07 Driver support
07
236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 234) can show symbols and text messages in the combined
instrument panel or in the centre console's screen in different situations.
Here are some examples:
SymbolA Message Specification
Driver Alert Time for a break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limita- tions (p. 231).
Driver Alert system Service required
The system is disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A The symbols are schematic.
Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 234)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 235)
Lane assistance* (p. 237)
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237
Lane assistance* Lane Keeping Aid is one of the functions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes also referred to as LKA (Lane Keeping Aid).
The function is intended for use on motor- ways and similar major roads in order to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in certain situations.
A camera reads the painted side lines of the road/lane. If the car is about to cross a side line then Lane Keeping Aid will actively steer the car back into the lane with a slight steer- ing torque in the steering wheel.
If the car reaches or crosses a side line then Lane Keeping Aid will also alert the driver with vibration in the steering wheel.
WARNING
LKA is merely a driver's aid and does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsi- bility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regulations are followed.
Related information Lane Keeping Aid - function (p. 237)
Lane Keeping Aid - operation (p. 239)
Lane Keeping Aid - limitations (p. 239)
Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and mes- sages (p. 241)
Driver Alert System* (p. 234)
Lane Keeping Aid - function Certain settings can be made for the Lane Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) function.
Off & On Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with clearly visible side lines. The function is temporarily deactivated on narrow roads with less than 2.6 metres between the lane side lines.
Press the centre console's button to activate or deactivate the function. The button's lamp illuminates when the function is switched on.
Some combinations of the selected equip- ment leave no vacant space for an On/Off button in the centre console - in which case, the function is instead operated in the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 112). Here, pro- ceed as follows:
|| 07 Driver support
07
238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Search for Lane Keeping Aid and then select On or Off.
In addition, the following selections can be made in MY CAR:
Warning with vibration in the steering wheel: Vibration only - On or Off.
Active steering: Steering assist only- On or Off.
Both Warning with vibration in the steer- ing wheel and Active steering: Full function - On or Off.
Active steering Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car within the side lines for the lane.
LKA intervenes and steers away.
If the car approaches the left or right side line of the lane and the direction indicator is not
activated, the car is steered back into the lane.
Warning with vibration in the steering wheel
LKA steers and alerts with steering wheel vibra- tion28.
If the car crosses a side line then Lane Keep- ing Aid will alert the driver with vibration in the steering wheel29. This occurs regardless of whether the car is actively steered back by applying a slight steering torque.
Dynamic cornering
LKA does not engage in sharp inside curves.
In certain cases Lane assistance will allow the car to cross lane lines without engaging active steering or activating a warning. Using an adjacent lane for cutting a corner when there is a clear line of vision is an example of this.
Related information Lane assistance* (p. 237)
28 The figure shows 3 vibrations when the side line is crossed. 29 Steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the time for which the car has crossed the side line, the more pulses there are.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239
Lane Keeping Aid - operation Lane Keeping Aid is complemented in the combined instrument panel with intuitive graphics in different situations. Here are some examples:
NOTE
LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long as the direction indicator is switched on.
LKA "sees" the following side lines.
If Lane Keeping Aid is active and detects/"sees" the side lines, the LKA symbol indicates this with WHITE lines.
GREY side line - Lane Keeping Aid does not see a line on that side of the car.
LKA engages on the right side.
Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers away from the side line - this is indicated with:
RED line for the side in question.
Related information Lane assistance* (p. 237)
Lane Keeping Aid - limitations Lane Keeping Aid's camera sensor has limita- tions in a similar way to the human eye.
For more information, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 231) and (p. 230).
NOTE
In certain demanding situations Lane assistance may have difficulty assisting the driver in the right way - in which case it is recommended to deactivate the function.
Examples of such situations may be:
roadworks
winter road conditions
poor road surface
very sporty driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
Hands on the steering wheel In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the driver must have his/her hands on the steer- ing wheel. LKA continually monitors this. If hands are not detected on the steering wheel then a text message is shown, prompting the driver to actively steer the car.
If the driver does not follow the request to begin steering then Lane Keeping Aid goes into standby mode and will remain in this
|| 07 Driver support
07
240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
mode until the driver begins to steer the car again.
Related information Lane assistance* (p. 237)
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241
Lane Keeping Aid - symbols and messages In situations where there is no Lane assis- tance function, a symbol may be shown in the
combined instrument panel in combination with an explanatory message - follow the rec- ommendation given if appropriate.
Message examples:
Symbol Message Specification
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limita- tions (p. 231) and (p. 230).
Lane Keeping Aid Serv- ice required
The system is disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Lane Keeping Aid Inter- rupted
LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active again.
Related information Lane assistance* (p. 237)
07 Driver support
07
242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Park Assist* Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console's VOL knob or in the car's menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 112).
Parking assistance is available in two vari- ants:
Rear only
Both front and rear.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking.
The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.
Be aware of e.g. people and animals near the car.
Related information Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 245)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 242)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 244)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 245)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 244)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park assist syst* - function The parking assistance system is automati- cally activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243
On/Off for the sensors for parking assistance and CTA30.
The centre console's display screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle.
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left front and right rear.
Marked sectors show which of the four sen- sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter the distance between the car and a detected obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the active sensor's field nearest the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both behind and in front of the car, then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks.
In such situations, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car par- ticularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since the sensors are temporarily unable to function opti- mally.
Related information Park Assist* (p. 242)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 245)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 244)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 245)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 244)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
30 Side warning, CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) (p. 257)
07 Driver support
07
244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Park assist syst* - backward Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind comes from one of the rear loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged.
When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the tow- bar, rear parking assistance is switched off automatically - otherwise the sensors would react to the trailer.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genu- ine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them.
Related information Park Assist* (p. 242)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 245)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 242)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 244)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 245)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park assist syst* - forward Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's screen indicate distance to detected obstacles.
The parking assistance system is automati- cally activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.
The distance covered in front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.
The front parking assistance system is active up to 10 km/h (6 mph). The light in the button is illuminated in order to indicate that the sys- tem is activated. When the speed is below 10 km/h (6 mph) the system is reactivated.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.
Related information Park Assist* (p. 242)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 245)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 242)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 245)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 244)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park assist syst* - fault indication Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the text message
Park Assist System Service required is shown then parking assistance is disen- gaged.
IMPORTANT
Under some circumstances, the parking sensors can give false warning signals due to external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Related information Park Assist* (p. 242)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 245)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 242)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 244)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 244)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors Parking assistance is used as an aid to park- ing. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
The sensors for parking assistance must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.
Sensor location, front.
|| 07 Driver support
07
246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Sensor location, rear.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
Related information Park Assist* (p. 242)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 242)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 244)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 245)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 244)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park assist camera The parking camera is an auxiliary system and is activated when the reverse gear is selected.
The camera image is shown on the centre console's screen.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.
WARNING
The parking camera is an aid and can never replace the responsibilities of the driver when reversing.
The camera has blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.
Be aware of people and animals near the car.
Function and operation
Camera location next to the opening handle.
The camera shows what is behind the car and if something appears from the sides.
The camera shows a wide area behind the car and part of the bumper and any towbar.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly - this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen.
If another view is active then the parking camera system takes over automatically and its camera image is displayed on the screen.
When reverse gear is selected, two unbroken lines are shown graphically which illustrate
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247
where the car's rear wheels will roll with the current steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer. The car's approxi- mate external dimensions are illustrated by means of dashed lines. The park assist lines can be deactivated - see section Settings (p. 248).
If the car is also equipped with Parking assis- tance sensors * (p. 242) then their information is shown graphically as coloured areas in order to illustrate the distance to detected obstacles, see heading "Cars with reversing sensors" later in the text.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged or until the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph) forward or 35 km/h (22 mph) backward.
Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light condi- tions can result in a slightly reduced image quality.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light.
Park assist lines
Examples of how the park assist lines can be dis- played for the driver.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and are directly related to steering wheel move- ment, which shows the driver the path the car will then take - also when the car is turning.
NOTE
When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the lines on the display show the route the car will take - not the trailer.
The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system.
The parking camera is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
IMPORTANT
Remember that the display only shows the area behind the car - so pay attention to the sides and front of the car when turning the steering while reversing.
Boundary lines
Different lines in the system.
Boundary line, free reversing zone
"Wheel tracks"
The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as door mirrors and corners - also when the car is turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no obstacle is in the way.
|| 07 Driver support
07
248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cars with reversing sensors*
Coloured areas (x 4 - one per sensor) show dis- tance.
If the car is also equipped with Parking assis- tance (p. 242) the distance is shown with col- oured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle.
The colour of the areas changes with decreasing distance to the obstacle - from light yellow to yellow, via orange to red.
Colour / paint Distance (metres)
Light yellow 0,71,5
Yellow 0,50,7
Orange 0,30,5
Red 00,3
Related information Park assist camera - settings (p. 248)
Park assist camera - limitations (p. 250)
Park Assist* (p. 242)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park assist camera - settings
Activate switched-off camera If the camera function is switched off when reverse gear is selected, it is activated in the following way:
Main source menu31.
1. Give one or two long presses on EXIT to access the main source menu.
2. Turn to the "Camera" option with TUNE and press OK/MENU.
3. In the following menu: - Turn to the desired camera view with TUNE and press OK/MENU - the screen shows the current camera view.
31 See the Sensus Infotainment supplement for more information about the menu system.
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249
Options* Cars with the front camera option have a CAM button on the climate panel.
Button location may vary depending on options for other equipment.
Press CAM to activate the camera - the screenshows the current camera view.
To change view between the reversing cam- era and front camera:
Press CAM or turn TUNE.
Change setting The default setting is that the camera is acti- vated when reverse gear is selected.
The settings for the parking camera can be changed when the screen shows a camera view:
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is shown - the screenchanges to a menu with various options.
2. Turn to reach the desired option with TUNE.
3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/ MENU once and go back out with EXIT.
Towbar The camera can be used to advantage when hitching a trailer. A park assist line for the towbar's intended "trajectory" toward the trailer can be shown on the screen - exactly as for the "wheel tracks".
A choice can be made between showing the "wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory - both options cannot be shown simultane- ously.
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is shown.
2. Turn to reach the Tow bar trajectory guide line option with TUNE.
3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/ MENU once and go back out with EXIT.
Zoom If precise manoeuvring is required then the camera view can be zoomed in:
Press CAM or turn TUNE - repeated press/turn changes back to the normal view.
If more options are available, they are in a loop - press/turn until the desired camera view is shown.
Related information Park assist camera (p. 246)
Park assist camera - limitations (p. 250)
Park Assist* (p. 242)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
07 Driver support
07
250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Park assist camera - limitations
NOTE
Bicycle racks or other accessories moun- ted on the back of the car may obscure the line of sight of the camera.
To bear in mind Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view. Obsta- cles could thereby go undetected until they are very close to the car.
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and snow.
Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- warm water and car shampoo - take care not to scratch the lens.
Related information Park assist camera (p. 246)
Park assist camera - settings (p. 248)
Park Assist* (p. 242)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space.
The combined instrument panel uses sym- bols, graphics and text when elements are to be executed.
The On/Off button is on the centre console.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.
WARNING
PAP does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always has the final responsibil- ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and for paying attention to the surround- ings and other road users approaching or passing during parking.
Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function
(p. 251)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p. 251)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p. 253)
Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and messages (p. 254)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function
The combined instrument panel uses sym- bols, graphics and text when elements are to be executed.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and turns the steering wheel - the driver's task is to:
keep a close watch around the car
follow the instructions in the combined instrument panel
change gear (reverse/forward)
control and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started:
The functions ABS32 or ESC33 must not intervene when the PAP function is acti- vated - these can be activated in the event of e.g. steep and slippery surfaces, see the sections on Foot brake (p. 292) and Stability system ESC (p. 185) for more information.
Trailers must not be connected to the car.
Speed must be lower than 50 km/h (30 mph).
Principle for PAP.
The PAP function parks the car using the fol- lowing steps:
1. The function searches for a parking space and measures it - during measurement, speed must not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph).
2. The car is steered into the space during reversing.
3. The car is positioned in the space by driv- ing forward and back.
Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation
The driver is instructed about how PAP works by means of simple, clear instructions in the combined instrument panel - using both graphics and text graphics and text message (p. 254).
NOTE
Remember that certain steering wheel positions may obstruct the combined instrument panel's instructions when you turn it during the parking manoeuvre.
1 - Searching and checking measurements
32 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system. 33 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.
|| 07 Driver support
07
252
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and turns the steering wheel - the driver's task is to:
keep a close watch around the car
follow the instructions in the combined instrument panel
change gear (reverse/forward)
control and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
The PAP function searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough. Proceed as follows:
1. Activate PAP by pressing this button and do not drive faster than 30 km/h (20 mph).
2. Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.
3. Stop the car when the graphics and text so request.
NOTE
PAP searches the area for a parking space, displays instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street:
Activate the direction indicator for the driver's side - the car is then parked on that side of the street instead.
2 - Reversing in
During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the car into the parking space. Proceed as fol- lows:
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear, then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).
3. Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.
NOTE
Keep your hands away from the steer- ing wheel when the PAP function is activated.
Make sure that the steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
To achieve optimum results - wait until the steering wheel is fully turned before starting to drive backward/ forward.
3 - Straightening up
When the car has reversed into the parking space, it must be straightened up and stop- ped.
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253
1. Engage first gear or D position, wait until the steering wheel has been turned, then drive slowly forwards.
2. Stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.
3. Engage reverse gear and drive back- wards slowly until the graphics and text message tell you to stop.
The function is disengaged automatically when parking is complete, and the graphics and text message show that parking is com- plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the positioning. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by PAP compared with when Park Assist uses the sensors.
Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations
The PAP sequence is stopped:
if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h (4 mph)
if the driver touches the steering wheel
if the ABS34 or ESC35 function is engaged - e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery road surface.
A text message indicates where the PAP sequence was stopped.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is inter- ference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultra- sound frequencies as those with which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
To bear in mind The driver should bear in mind that the Park Assist Pilot is an aid not an infallible, fully- automatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to intervene. There are also a few details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:
PAP starts out from the current location of the parked vehicles - if they are inap- propriately parked then the car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged against kerbs.
PAP is designed for parking on straight streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the parking space when PAP measures the space.
It is not always possible to find parking spaces on narrow streets since there is not enough space for manoeuvring. In such parking situations, it helps the sys- tem to drive as close to the side of the road as possible where you intend to park.
Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic while being parked.
Objects situated higher than the detection areas of the sensors are not included when calculations are made for the park- ing manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to swing into the parking space too early,
34 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system. 35 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability and traction control system.
|| 07 Driver support
07
254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
and hence such parking spaces should be avoided.
The driver is responsible for determining whether the space selected by PAP is suitable for parking.
Use approved tyres36 with the correct tyre pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to park the car.
Heavy rain or snow may cause the sys- tem to measure the parking space incor- rectly.
Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted.
Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro- truding from the car.
IMPORTANT
The PAP system's parameters may need to be updated when changing to another approved wheel rim size involving changed tyre circumference. Consult a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Maintenance
The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers37 - 6 front and 4 rear.
For the PAP function to work correctly, its sensors must be cleaned (p. 245) regularly with water and car shampoo - these are the same sensors as are used by parking assis- tance (p. 242).
Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
Active Park Assist (PAP)* - symbols and messages
The combined instrument panel can show dif- ferent combinations of symbols and text with varying content - sometimes with a self- explanatory piece of advice on appropriate action.
If a message says that the Park Assist Pilot is disengaged, contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 250)
Park assist camera (p. 246)
36 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory. 37 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255
BLIS BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a function designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.
BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left and right lanes closest to the car.
WARNING
BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.
BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mir- rors.
BLIS can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to change lanes in a safe manner.
Overview
Position of the BLIS lamp38.
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehi- cle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.
Maintenance The sensors for the BLIS functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each corner of the car.
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.
To ensure optimal functionality, the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Related information BLIS - operation (p. 256)
BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages (p. 259)
CTA* (p. 257)
38 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
07 Driver support
07
256
BLIS - operation BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a function designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.
Activate/deactivate BLIS BLIS is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once.
Button for activating/deactivating.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/acti- vated by pressing the BLIS button on the centre console.
Some combinations of the selected equip- ment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case the func- tion is handled by the car's menu system MY CAR39:
Select On or Off at Settings Car settings BLIS.
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in the button goes out/illuminates and the combined instrument panel confirms the change with a text message. The door panel indicator lamps flash once upon activation.
To extinguish the message:
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
or
Wait approx. 5 seconds the message extinguishes.
When BLIS operates
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds above 10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is designed to react when:
the vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching the vehicle.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a con- stant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning in this situation then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being reversed.
Limitations Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossi- ble to provide warnings. BLIS cannot detect hazards if it is covered.
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.
BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the car's electrical system.
39 For information on the menu system - MY CAR (p. 112).
07 Driver support
07
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Related information BLIS (p. 255)
BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages (p. 259)
CTA* The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver aid intended to warn about crossing traffic when the car is reversing. CTA is a sup- plement to BLIS (p. 255).
Activate/deactivate CTA CTA is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once.
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.
In cars equipped with Parking assistance (p. 242), the CTA function can be deacti- vated/activated separately with the parking assistance On/Off button.
In cars without a button for parking assis- tance, the CTA function can be operated in the menu system MY CAR (p. 112), as fol- lows:
Search for Cross Traffic Alert under BLIS and uncheck - the CTA function is then deactivated.
However, the BLIS function remains activated after the CTA has been deactivated.
WARNING
CTA is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.
CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
CTA can never replace the driver's respon- sibility and attention - it is always the driv- er's responsibility to reverse in a safe man- ner.
When CTA operates
Principle for CTA.
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being able to see crossing traffic from the side dur-
|| 07 Driver support
07
258
ing reversing, such as when reversing out of a parking space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions, it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians.
CTA is only active during reversing and is activated automatically when reverse is selected at the gearbox.
If CTA detects something approaching from the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds. The signal comes from either the left or the right speaker depending on which direction the approaching object is coming from.
CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS lamps.
An additional warning is provided in the form of an illuminated icon in the display screen's PAS graphics (p. 242).
Limitations CTA does not perform optimally in all situa- tions, but has a certain limitation - for exam- ple, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field of vision" may be limited from the beginning and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close:
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector where CTA can detect/"see".
In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely "blind" on one side.
However, when the driver is slowly reversing the car, the angle is changed in relation to the
vehicle/object that is blocking, at which the blind sector rapidly decreases.
Examples of further limitations:
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can reduce functionality and make it impossi- ble to provide warnings. CTA cannot detect hazards if it is covered.
CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the cars electrical system.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.
Maintenance The sensors for the BLIS and CTA functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each corner of the car.
07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.
To ensure optimal functionality, the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.
Related information BLIS (p. 255)
BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages (p. 259)
BLIS and CTA - symbols and messages In situations where the BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) (p. 255) and CTA (p. 257) functions fail or are interrupted, the combined instrument panel may show a symbol, supple- mented by an explanatory message. Follow any recommendation given.
Message examples:
Message Specification
CTA OFF CTA has been deactivated manually. BLIS is active.
BLIS and CTA OFF Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA are tempo- rarily disabled because a trailer is connected to the cars electrical system.
BLIS and CTA Serv- ice required
BLIS and CTA are not working.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.
A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direc- tion indicator stalk.
Related information BLIS (p. 255)
CTA* (p. 257)
07 Driver support
07
260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Adjustable steering force* Speed related power steering causes the steering wheel force to increase with the speed of the car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
On motorways the steering feels firmer. Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three differ- ent levels of steering force for road respon- siveness or steering sensitivity in the menu system MY CAR (p. 112):
Once there, search for Steering force level and select Low, Medium or High.
This menu is not accessible when the car is moving.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering may become too hot and then needs to be temporarily cooled - during this time the power steering operates with reduced power and turning the steering wheel may then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steering assistance the combined instru- ment panel shows a message.
Related information MY CAR (p. 112)
07 Driver support
07
}} 261
Type approval - radar system Type approval for the car's radar units can be seen in the following table.
Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval
Brazil
Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio.
Modelo: L2C0038TR
1071-10-3451
EAN: 07897843800248
Modelo: L2C0055TR
1500-15-8065
EAN: 07897843840978
Europe
Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0038TR / L2C0055TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
The United Arab Emi- rates
TRA
REGISTERED No: 0018923/09
DEALER No: DA37380/15
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER37357/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
|| 07 Driver support
07
262
Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval
Indonesia 14785/POSTEL/2010 1982
38806/SDPPI/2015 4927
Jordan
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2009/87
Equipment type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Morocco
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numero d'agrement : MR 4838 ANRT 2009
Date d'agrement : 22/05/2009
AGREE PAR LANRT MAROC
NUMRO DAGRMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE DAGRMENT: 26/12/2014
Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DA105753
South Africa
TA-2009/163
APPROVED
TA-2014/2390
APPROVED
07 Driver support
07
263
Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval
Taiwan CCAB09LP4590T3
CCAB15LP0680T0
A ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control B BLIS = Blind Spot Information
Related information Radar sensor (p. 210)
STARTING AND DRIVING
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265
Alcohol lock* The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.
Related information Alcohol lock* - functions (p. 265)
Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 266)
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine (p. 266)
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 267)
Alcohol lock* - text messages (p. 269)
Alcohol lock* - functions
Nozzle for breath test.
Button for change of driver.
Transmission button.
Voltage indicator.
Lamp for result of breath test.
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
NOTE
Store the alcohol lock in its holder. The alcohol lock is activated automatically when the car is opened.
Related information Alcohol lock* (p. 265)
Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 266)
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine (p. 266)
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 267)
Alcohol lock* - text messages (p. 269)
08 Starting and driving
08
266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Alcohol lock* - storage Store the alcohol lock in its holder.
Handheld unit storage location.
Release the handheld unit by pressing apart the upper edge of the holder and the alcohol lock. The holder is flexible and then releases its grip on the alcohol lock.
Store the handheld unit in the holder not in use - this provides it with the best pro- tection. Replace the handheld unit in the holder by pushing it in the holder.
Related information Alcohol lock* (p. 265)
Alcohol lock* - functions (p. 265)
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine (p. 266)
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 267)
Alcohol lock* - text messages (p. 269)
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.
Nozzle for breath test.
Button for change of driver.
Transmission button.
Voltage indicator.
Lamp for result of breath test.
Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the alcohol lock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the alcohol lock from its holder. 3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath test.
4. If no message is shown then the trans- mission to the car may have failed - in which case, press the button (3) to trans- mit the result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the alcohol lock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it must be repeated.
08 Starting and driving
08
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267
Result after breath test
Indicator lamp (5) + Display text
Specification
Green lamp + Alcoguard Approved test
Start the engine - no alcohol content meas- ured.
Yellow lamp + Alcoguard Approved test
Engine starting possi- ble - measured alcohol content is above 0.1 promille but below the limit value in forceA.
Red lamp + Dis- approved test Wait 1 minute to try again
Engine starting not possible - measured alcohol content is above the limit value in forceA.
A Limit values vary from country to country. Find out what applies in your country. See also Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 267).
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.
Related information Alcohol lock* (p. 265)
Alcohol lock* - functions (p. 265)
Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 266)
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 267)
Alcohol lock* - text messages (p. 269)
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible:
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver In order to ensure that a new breath test is carried out in the event of a change of driver - depress the button (2) for change of driver and the send button (3) simultaneously for approx.3 seconds. At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before star- ting the engine.
|| 08 Starting and driving
08
268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Calibration and service The alcohol lock must be checked and cali- brated at a workshop1 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the combined instrument panel shows the mes- sage Alcoguard Calibration required See manual. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked - only starting with the Bypass function will then be possible, see the follow- ing heading "Emergency situation".
The message can be cleared by pressing the send button (3) once. Otherwise it extin- guishes on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reappears each time the engine is started - only recalibration at a workshop1
can clear the message permanently.
Cold or hot weather The colder the weather the longer it takes before the alcohol lock is ready for use:
Temperature (C) Maximum heat- ing time (sec-
onds)
+10 to +85 10
-5 to +10 60
-40 to -5 180
Emergency situation In the event of an emergency situation or the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car.
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory, see Recording data (p. 20).
After the bypass function has been activated the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a work- shop1.
The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged - in which case, carry out all the steps without starting the car. The error message is cleared when the car is locked.
When the alcohol lock is installed, either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option. This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop1.
Activating the Bypass function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz- ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru- ment panel first shows Bypass activated
Please wait for 1 minute and then Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after which the engine can be started.
This function can be activated several times. The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop1.
Activating the Emergency function
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch OK button and the button for haz- ard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the combined instru- ment panel shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a reset must be made at a workshop1.
Related information Alcohol lock* (p. 265)
Alcohol lock* - functions (p. 265)
Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 266)
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine (p. 266)
Alcohol lock* - text messages (p. 269)
1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
08 Starting and driving
08
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269
Alcohol lock* - text messages In addition to the previously described mes- sages related to how the alcohol lock works before starting the engine (p. 266) the com- bined instrument panel's display can also show the following:
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Restart possi- ble
The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes - engine starting possible without new test.
Alcoguard Service required
Contact a workshopA.
Alcoguard No signal received
Transmission failed - send manually with but- ton (3) or take a new breath test.
Alcoguard Please try again
Test failed - take a new breath test.
Alcoguard Please blow longer
Blowing too short - blow for longer.
Alcoguard Please blow softer
Blowing too hard - blow more gently.
Display text Meaning/Action
Alcoguard Please blow harder
Blowing too weak - blow harder.
Alcoguard preheating Please wait
Heating not finished - wait for text Alcoguard Please blow for 5 sec- onds.
A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information Alcohol lock* (p. 265)
Alcohol lock* - functions (p. 265)
Alcohol lock* - storage (p. 266)
Alcohol lock* - before starting the engine (p. 266)
Alcohol lock* - to bear in mind (p. 267)
Starting the engine The engine is started and switched off using the remote control key and the START/STOP ENGINE button.
Ignition switch with remote control key extrac- ted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade; see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 166)
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch and press it in to its end posi- tion. Note that if the car is equipped with alcohol lock* then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started. For more information on the Alcohol lock, see Alcohol lock* (p. 265).
|| 08 Starting and driving
08
270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed2. (For cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the brake pedal.)
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button and then release it.
The starter motor works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection trig- gers.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, and make sure that the key position is 0 - in particular if there are children in the car. For information on how this works, see Key positions (p. 79).
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal oper- ating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.
Keyless starting (Keyless drive)* Follow steps 23 for keyless (p. 168) starting of petrol and diesel engines.
NOTE
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that one of the car's remote control keys with the keyless start and lock function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing.
Related information Key positions (p. 79)
Switching off the engine The engine is switched off using the START/ STOP ENGINE button.
To switch off the engine:
Press the START/STOP ENGINE button - the engine stops.
If the car has an automatic gearbox and the gear selector is not in a position P or if the car is moving - Press twice or hold the START/STOP ENGINE button depressed until the engine stops.
Related information Key positions (p. 79)
2 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.
08 Starting and driving
08
}} 271
Steering lock The steering lock makes steering difficult if the car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise may be noticed when the steering lock unlocks or locks.
Function The steering lock is activated when the
driver's door is opened after the engine has been switched off.
The steering lock is deactivated when the remote control key is in the ignition switch3 and the START/STOP ENGINE button is depressed.
Related information Starting the engine (p. 269)
Key positions (p. 79)
Steering wheel (p. 85)
Jump starting If the starter battery (p. 358) is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery.
When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short cir- cuits or other damage:
1. Set the car's electrical system in key position 0, see Key positions (p. 79).
2. Check that the donor battery has a volt- age of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover.
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive terminal (2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the top, the outer screw head (4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting attempt.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
3 In cars with keyless start and lock system it is enough to have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
|| 08 Starting and driving
08
272
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- charged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not use the connections when attempt- ing to start, as there is a risk of sparking.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - first the black and then the red. > Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
Related information Starting the engine (p. 269)
Gearboxes There are two main types of gearbox - Manual and Automatic.
Manual gearbox (p. 272)
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 274) and Powershift (p. 278)
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol in the com- bined instrument panel lights up and a text message is shown. Follow the recommen- dation given in the text message.
Manual gearbox The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements.
Gearing pattern.
The 6-speed box is available in two versions - reverse gear position differs between them. Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situa- tions.
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273
Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possi- bility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.
Follow the gearing pattern printed on the gear lever and start from neutral position, N before moving it to R position.
Engage reverse gear only when the car is stationary.
Related information Transmission fluid - grade and volume
(p. 392)
Gearboxes (p. 272)
Gear shift indicator* The gear shift indicator notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption.
An essential detail in connection with environ- mental driving is to drive in the right gear and to change gear in plenty of time.
An indicator is available as an aid on some variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consump- tion. However, taking into consideration cha- racteristics such as performance and vibra- tion-free running, it may be advantageous to change gear at a higher engine speed.
Manual gearbox Gear shift indicator for man- ual gearbox. Only one marker is illuminated at a time - it is illuminated in the centre only during normal driving.
At the recommended upshift the cursor illumi- nates "+", and at the recommended down- shift the cursor illuminates "-" (marked red in the illustration).
Automatic gearbox
Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear shift indicator.
The framed number indicates the current gear.
With "Analogue" combined instrument panel, the gear positions and indicator arrows are displayed in its centre.
Related information Manual gearbox (p. 272)
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274)
08 Starting and driving
08
274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* An automatic gearbox with Geartronic differs from an Automatic gearbox - Powershift (p. 278), in that it has a hydraulic torque con- verter that transfers power from engine to gearbox. It has two different gear modes - Automatic and Manual.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/: Manual gear positions. S: Sport mode*.4
The combined instrument panel shows the position of the gear selector using the follow- ing indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.
Gear positions Automatic gear positions are indicated on the right of the combined instrument panel. (Only one marker is illumi- nated at a time - the one showing the current gear selector position.)
Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when the mode is active.
P Parking position Select P when starting the engine or when the car is parked.
To be able to move the gear selector from the P position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the key position must be II.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Also apply the parking brake when the car is parked, see Parking brake (p. 294).
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when posi- tion P is selected.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - the automatic trans- mission in P is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
R Reverse The car must be stationary when position R is selected.
N Neutral No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in position N.
In order to be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the key position (p. 79) must be II.
D Drive D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R.
Geartronic Manual gear positions (+/-) The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.
4 The gear lever's gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option.
08 Starting and driving
08
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275
The manual gear position is reached by mov- ing the lever to the side from position D to the end position at "+/-". The combined instru- ment panel's symbol "+/-" changes colour from WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc. are displayed in a box which corre- sponds to the gear that has just been selected.
Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release the lever, which returns to its neutral position between "+" and "".
or
Pull the lever back towards "" (minus) to change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode "+/-" can be selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
Move the lever to the side to the end position at D.
NOTE
f the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the lever has been moved forwards or backwards in its "+/-" position. The com- bined instrument panel then shifts the indi- cation from S to show which of the gears 1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged.
Paddles* As a supplement to manual gear changing with the gear selector there are also controls located on the steering wheel, so-called "paddles".
To be able to change gear with the steering wheel paddles they must first be activated. This is by means of pulling one of the paddles toward the steering wheel - the combined instrument panel then changes indication from "D" to a figure, which indicates the cur- rent gear.
To then change gear one step:
Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards the steering wheel - and release.
Both steering wheel "paddles".
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the pad- dle provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range.
After each gear change the combined instru- ment panel changes figure to show the cur- rent gear.
|| 08 Starting and driving
08
276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Automatic deactivation
If the steering wheel paddles are not used then they are deactivated after a short time - this is indicated when the combined instrument panel switches indication, from the figure for the current gear back to "D".
The exception is during engine braking - then the paddles are activated as long as engine braking is in progress.
Manual deactivation
The steering wheel paddle shifters can also be deactivated manually:
Pull both paddles toward the steering wheel and hold until the combined instrument panel changes character from the figure for the current gear to "D".
The paddles can also be used with the gear selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles are constantly activated without being deacti- vated.
Geartronic - Sport mode (S) The Sport programme provides sportier characteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears. At the same time it responds more
quickly to acceleration. During active driving, the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift.
To activate Sport mode:
Move the gear selector to the side from D position to the end position at "+S" - the combined instrument panel changes indi- cation from D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector from D position to the end position at "+/" - the combined instru- ment panel shifts the indication from D to the figure 15.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the combined instrument panel shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
3. Release the brake and accelerate care- fully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick- down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- tion is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gear- box control program has a protective down- shift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down function.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/ kick-down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depend- ing on engine speed. The car changes up
5 If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277
when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.
Towing If the car has to be towed - see important information in the section Towing (p. 312).
Related information Transmission fluid - grade and volume
(p. 392)
Gearboxes (p. 272)
Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 278)
08 Starting and driving
08
278 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Automatic gearbox - Powershift* The Powershift automatic gearbox transmits the motive force from the engine to the drive wheels with double mechanical clutch discs, as opposed to Geartronic which instead uses a hydraulic torque converter.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/: Manual gear positions. S: Sport mode*.6
Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as the Geartronic automatic transmission.
One exception is "Geartronic - Winter mode" (p. 274):
Powershift enables driving away on a slippery road surface if 2nd gear is engaged manually - instead of 3rd gear with Geartronic.
Towing The model with Powershift transmission should not be towed as it is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient lubrication. If towing (p. 312) still has to take place, the route must be as short as possible and then at very low speed.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether the car is equipped with Powershift or Geartronic transmission, this can be verified by checking the designation on the gearbox label under the bonnet, Type designations (p. 380). The designation MPS6 means that it is Powershift transmission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission.
See also important information in section Towing (p. 312).
To bear in mind The transmission's double clutch has over- load protection that is activated if it becomes too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time.
Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illuminates and the combined instrument panel shows a message. The transmission may also overheat during slow driving in
queues (10 km/h (6 mph) or slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer hitched. The gearbox cools down when the car is station- ary, with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages:
Stop the car and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until there is a moderate distance to the traffic ahead, drive for- ward a short distance, and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal.
IMPORTANT
Use the foot brake to hold the car station- ary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal. The gear- box could then overheat.
Text message and action In some situations the combined instrument panel may show a text message at the same time as a symbol is illuminated.
6 The gear lever's gearshift pattern varies depending on engine option.
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 279
Symbol Message Driving characteristics Action
Transmission hot Brake to hold
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at constant engine speed.
Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the foot brake.A
Transmission hot Park safely Let engine run
Significant pulling in the car's trac- tion.
Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe manner.A
Transmission cooling Let engine run
No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears.
A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot. In parallel with the text message, the driver is also advised that the car's electronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics. Follow the instructions in the text message where appropriate.
NOTE
The examples in the table are no indication of the car being defective, but show that a safety function has been activated with a view to preventing damage to any of the car's components.
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text Transmission hot Park safely Let engine run is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmission between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible text messages with their respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic gearbox, see Messages (p. 110).
A text message extinguishes automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk OK button.
Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274)
Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p. 392)
08 Starting and driving
08
280 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Gear selector inhibitor There are two different types of gear selector inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
G 0 2 1 3 5 1
The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety systems:
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another posi- tion.
Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position (P) In order to be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the key posi- tion (p. 79) must be II.
Shiftlock Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 sec- onds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.
In order to be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the key position (p. 79) must be II.
Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat starter battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift out the contoured insert in the com- partment behind the centre console and locate a spring-loaded button in the bot- tom of the compartment.
Press and hold the button.
Move the gear selector from the P posi- tion and release the button.
4. Refit the storage compartment insert.
Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274)
Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 278)
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281
Hill start assist (HSA)* The foot brake can be released before setting off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that the car does not roll backwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver acceler- ates.
Related information Starting the engine (p. 269)
Start/Stop* Some engine and gearbox combinations come fitted with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then switched off temporarily and restarts auto- matically when the journey is due to continue.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Cor- poration's core values and it influences all of our operations. This target orientation has resulted in several separate energy-saving functions of which Start/Stop is one, all with the collective task of reducing fuel consump- tion, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.
General information on Start/Stop
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and cleaner...
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active environmentally
conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to allow the engine to stop auto- matically, whenever appropriate.
Manual or Automatic
Note that there are differences in the Start/Stop function depending on whether the gearbox is manual or automatic.
Related information Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 282)
Starting the engine (p. 269)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 285)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 283)
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 288)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
08 Starting and driving
08
282 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Start/Stop* - function and operation The Start/Stop function is activated automati- cally when the engine is started with the key.
The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key. The driver is alerted to the function by means of the symbol for the On/Off button illuminating in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the On/Off button illuminating.
All of the car's normal systems such as light- ing, radio, etc. work as normal even with an engine that has stopped automatically, except that some equipment may have the function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system.
Auto-stopping the engine The following is required for the engine to auto-stop:
Conditions M/A A
Declutch, set the gear lever in neu- tral position and release the clutch pedal - the engine stops automati- cally.
M
Stop the car with the foot brake and then keep your foot on the pedal - the engine stops automati- cally.
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If the ECO function is acti- vated then the engine may auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.
For certain engine variants the engine may auto-stop before the car is stationary regard- less of whether the ECO function is activated.
When the engine is auto-stopped, the combined instrument panel's symbol for the Start/Stop function illuminates.
Auto-starting the engine
Conditions M/ AA
With the gear lever in neutral posi- tion:
1. Depress the clutch pedal or press the accelerator pedal - the engine starts.
2. Engage a suitable gear and drive.
M
Release the foot pressure on the foot brake - the engine starts auto- matically and the journey can con- tinue.
A
Maintain foot pressure on the foot brake and depress the accelerator pedal - the engine auto-starts.
A
The following option is also availa- ble on a downhill gradient:
Release the foot brake and let the car move off - the engine starts automatically when the speed exceeds normal walking pace.
M + A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
08 Starting and driving
08
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283
Deactivating the Start/Stop function In certain situations, it may advisable to temporarily switch off the automatic Start/Stop function - this is carried out with a push of this button.
Disengaged function is indicated by the combined instrument panel's Start/Stop symbols and the button's lamp extinguishing.
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key.
Start assistance HSA The foot brake can also be released on an uphill slope to auto-start the engine - the HSA (p. 281) (Hill Start Assist) function prevents the car from rolling backwards.
HSA means that the pressure in the brake system remains temporarily available while the driver's foot is moved from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal for driving off with the engine having stopped automatically. The temporary braking effect releases after a couple of seconds or when the driver acceler- ates.
Related information Start/Stop* (p. 281)
Starting the engine (p. 269)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 285)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 283)
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 288)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop Although the Start/Stop function is activated, the engine does not always stop automati- cally.
The engine does not auto-stop if:
Conditions M/A A
the car has not first achieved approx. 8 km/h (5 mph) after a key start or the last auto-stop.
M + A
the driver has opened the seat- belt's buckle.
M + A
the capacity of the starter battery is below the minimum permissible level.
M + A
the engine does not have normal operating temperature.
M + A
ambient temperature is around freezing point or above approx. 30 C.
M + A
the windscreen's electric heating is activated.
M + A
|| 08 Starting and driving
08
284 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Conditions M/A A
the environment in the passenger compartment differs from the pre- set valuesB - indicated by the ven- tilation fan running at a high speed.
M + A
the car is reversed. M + A
the starter battery's temperature is below freezing point or too high.
M + A
the driver makes greater steering wheel movements.
M + A
the exhaust system's particulate filter is full - the temporarily disen- gaged Start/Stop function is reac- tivated as soon as an automatic cleaning cycle has been per- formed (see Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 303)).
M + A
the road is very steep. M + A
a trailer is connected electrically to the cars electrical system.
M + A
the bonnet has been openedC. M + A
Conditions M/A A
the gearbox does not have normal operating temperature.
A
the atmospheric air pressure is less than equivalent to 1500-2500 metres above sea level - the current air pressure varies with the prevailing weather condi- tions.
A
adaptive cruise control Queue Assist is activated.
A
the gear selector is moved out of the D position to S positionD or "+/-".
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B Car with ECC. C With certain engines only. D Sport mode.
Related information Start/Stop* (p. 281)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 282)
Starting the engine (p. 269)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 285)
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 288)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 285
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts An auto-stopped engine may restart in certain cases without the driver having decided that the journey should continue.
In the following cases the engine also starts automatically if the driver has not depressed the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):
Conditions M/AA
Misting forms on the windows. M + A
The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the preset valuesB.
M + A
There is a temporarily high current take-off or starter battery capacity drops below the lowest permissi- ble level.
M + A
Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
M + A
The bonnet is openedC. M + A
The car starts to roll, or there is a small increase in speed if the car auto-stopped without being com- pletely stationary.
M + A
Conditions M/AA
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with the gear selector in D or N position.
A
Steering wheel movementsC. A
The gear selector is moved out of the D position to S positionD, R or "+/-".
A
The driver's door is opened with the gear selector in D position - a "ping" sound and text message inform that the Start/Stop function is active.
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B Car with ECC. C With certain engines only. D Sport mode.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has stopped automatically - the engine may suddenly start automatically. First switch off the engine as normal using the START/STOP ENGINE button before opening the bonnet.
Related information Start/Stop* - function and operation
(p. 282)
Starting the engine (p. 269)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 283)
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 288)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
Start/Stop* (p. 281)
08 Starting and driving
08
286 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start The engine does not always auto-start after having auto-stopped.
In the following cases the engine does not auto-start after having auto-stopped:
Conditions M/A A
A gear is engaged without declutching - a display text prompts the driver to set the gear lever in neutral position in order to enable automatic starting.
M
The driver is unrestrained. M
The driver is unrestrained, the gear selector is in P position and the drivers door is open - a normal engine start must take place.
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Related information Start/Stop* (p. 281)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 282)
Starting the engine (p. 269)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 285)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 283)
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 288)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox
If a start-up fails and the engine stops, pro- ceed in accordance with the below:
1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked in the seatbelt buckle.
2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine starts automatically.
3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in neutral position. The combined instrument panel then shows the text Put gear in neutral.
Related information Start/Stop* (p. 281)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 282)
Starting the engine (p. 269)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 285)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 283)
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 288)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287
Start/Stop* - settings The car's menu system MY CAR (p. 112) con- tains information on Volvo's Start-Stop sys- tem, as well as recommendations for energy- saving driving techniques.
Related information Start/Stop* (p. 281)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 282)
Starting the engine (p. 269)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 285)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 283)
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 288)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
08 Starting and driving
08
288 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages The Start/Stop function can show text mes- sages in the combined instrument panel.
Text message In combination with this indicator lamp the Start/Stop function may display text messages in the com-
bined instrument panel for certain situations.
For some of them there is a recommended action that should be performed. The follow- ing table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA
Auto Start/Stop Service required
Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.
M + A
Autostart Engine running + acoustic signal
Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector in D position.
A
Press start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
M + A
Depress clutch pedal to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed. M
Depress brake and clutch pedals to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed. M
Put gear in neutral to start Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position. M
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 289
Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA
Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
A
Press start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N.
A
A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If a message does not go out following com- pletion of the action then a workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information Start/Stop* (p. 281)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 282)
Starting the engine (p. 269)
Start/Stop* - settings (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto- start (p. 286)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 285)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 283)
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 286)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
08 Starting and driving
08
290 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Drive mode ECO* ECO7 is an innovative Volvo function for auto- matic-gearbox cars, capable of reducing fuel consumption by up to 5%, depending on the driver's driving style. The function gives the driver the option of a more active environ- mentally conscious way of driving.
General The following are changed upon activation of the ECO function:
Gearbox gearshift points.
Engine management and response from the accelerator pedal.
Start/Stop function - the engine can also auto-stop before the car has stopped down to being completely stationary.
The Eco Coast function is activated - engine braking ceases.
Climate control system settings - some electricity consumers are deactivated or operate at reduced power.
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, sev- eral parameters in the climate control sys- tem's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only restored by deactivating the ECO function.
ECO - Operation
ECO On/Off
ECO symbol
The ECO function is deactivated when the engine is switched off, and must therefore be activated after each time the engine is started. There are exceptions for certain engines. However, it is easily verified by means of both the combined instrument pan-
el's ECO symbol and the ECO- button's lamp illuminating when the function is activated.
ECO function On or Off Disengaged ECO function is indicated by the combined instrument panel ECO sym- bol and the ECO button lamp extinguishing. The function is then switched off until it is reactivated with the ECO button.
Eco Coast - Function The Eco Coast subfunction means in practice that engine braking is deactivated, meaning in turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to coast for longer distances. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically disengaged from the engine whose speed is reduced to idling speed with minimum consumption.
This function is intended for use in the event of an anticipated reduction in speed, e.g. to coast into a zone with a lower speed limit.
Eco Coast enables proactive driving where the driver can use the so-called "Pulse & Glide" technique and a minimum of braking.
A combination of Eco Coast and temporarily deactivated ECO function can also collec-
7 Not possible on the V40 CROSS COUNTRY with AWD.
08 Starting and driving
08
291
tively contribute to reduced consumption. Accordingly:
Active Eco Coast: Long coasting without engine braking = Low consumption
and
Deactivated ECO function: Short coasting with engine braking = Minimum con- sumption.
NOTE
However, to achieve optimal low fuel con- sumption, Eco Coast in combination with short coasting distances should generally be avoided.
Activating Eco Coast The function is activated when the accelera- tor pedal is fully released, in combination with the following parameters:
ECO button activated
Gear selector in D position
Speed within the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph)
The road's downhill gradient is not steeper than approx. 6%.
Deactivate Eco Coast In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate the Eco Coast function. Examples of such situations include:
on steep downhill gradients - to be able to use engine braking.
before an imminent overtaking manoeu- vre - in order to be able to complete it in the safest possible way.
Deactivating Eco Coast and returning to engine braking can be performed as follows:
Press the ECO button.
Move the gear lever to manual "S+/-" position.
Change gear with the steering wheel pad- dle shifters.
Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
Eco Coast - Limitations The function is not available if:
cruise control is activated
the road's downhill gradient is steeper than approx. 6%
manual gear changing is performed with the steering wheel paddle shifters*
engine and/or gearbox are not at normal operating temperature
the gear selector is moved from D- to "S +/-" position
speed is outside the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
More information and settings
The car's menu system MY CAR contains further information on the ECO concept - see the section MY CAR (p. 112).
Related information General information on climate control
(p. 124)
08 Starting and driving
08
292 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Foot brake The foot brake is used to reduce the car's speed while driving.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a brake circuit is damaged then the brake pedal will engage deeper and a higher pres- sure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force must be used to brake the car.
For cars with the Hill start assist (HSA)* (p. 281)* function, the pedal returns more slowly than usual to normal position if the car is parked on a gradient or on an uneven sur- face.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads on the car, Engine oil - adverse driving condi- tions (p. 388).
Braking on wet roads When driving for a long time in heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may be delayed slightly when next using the brakes. This may also be the case after a car wash. It is then necessary to depress the brake harder. For this reason, maintain a greater distance to the traffic ahead.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads and after a car wash. The brake discs are then warmed up, dry more quickly and are protected against corrosion. Take the prevail- ing traffic situation into account when brak- ing.
Braking on salted roads When driving on salted roads a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and brake lin- ings. This may extend braking distance. For this reason, keep an extra-large safety dis- tance to the vehicle ahead. Also make sure of the following:
Brake occasionally to remove any layer of salt. Make sure that other road users are not put at risk by the braking.
Gently depress the brake pedal when driving is finished and before the next journey starts.
Maintenance To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- ble, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Book- let.
New and replacement brake linings and brake discs only provide optimal brake performance after a few hundred kilometres after "wearing- in". Compensate for the reduced brake per- formance by depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that are approved for your Volvo.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's compo- nents must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
08 Starting and driving
08
293
Symbols in the combined instrument panel
Symbol Specification
Constant glow Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started automatic function check.
WARNING
If and illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake sys- tem.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake sys- tem checked - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.
Related information Parking brake (p. 294)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 294)
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 294)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 293)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), prevents the wheels from locking up during braking.
The function allows the steering ability to be maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made auto- matically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made at low speed. The test may be expe- rienced as pulses in the brake pedal.
Related information Foot brake (p. 292)
Parking brake (p. 294)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 294)
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 294)
08 Starting and driving
08
294
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h (31 mph) if the ABS system is working and/or in the event of heavy braking. After the car's speed has been slowed below 10 km/h (6 mph) the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow - while at the same time the Hazard warning flashers are activated, and they flash until the driver accelerates the car to at least 20 km/h (12 mph) or they are deactivated with their button.
Related information Foot brake (p. 292)
Parking brake (p. 294)
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 294)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 293)
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking force and so reduce the braking distance.
EBA detects the driver's braking style and increases the braking force when necessary. The brake force can be reinforced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as neces- sary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.
Related information Foot brake (p. 292)
Parking brake (p. 294)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 294)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 293)
Parking brake The parking brake holds the car stationary, when the driver's seat is empty, by mechani- cally locking/blocking two wheels.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has automatic transmis- sion, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
Combined instrument panel warning symbol.
Applying the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
08 Starting and driving
08
}} 295
2. Pull the lever firmly. > The combined instrument panel
warning symbol comes on. The warn- ing symbol illuminates regardless of whether the parking brake is applied gently or firmly.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake lever must be applied at least a lit- tle more firmly.
When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).
Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill:
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Disengaging the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever up slightly, press the button, release the lever and release the button. > The combined instrument panel warn-
ing symbol goes off.
If the driver forgets to release the parking brake in addition to the illuminated warning lamp a pinging sound combined with a message in the combined instrument panel
alerts the driver of this when the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).
Related information Foot brake (p. 292)
Driving in water Driving in water means that the car is driven through deep water on a water-covered road- way. Fording must be carried out with great caution.
The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of walking pace. Extra caution must be exercised when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.
If necessary, clean the contacts for the electric heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.
Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions.
|| 08 Starting and driving
08
296
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems.
Damage to any component, engine, trans- mission, turbocharger, differential or its internal components caused by flooding, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the warranty.
In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.
Related information Recovery (p. 314)
Towing (p. 312)
Overheating Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driv- ing with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer (p. 305).
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high then a warning symbol is illuminated and a text message High engine temperature Stop safely is shown in the combined instrument pan- el's information display - stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes in order to cool down.
If the text message High engine temperature Turn off engine or Engine coolant level low Stop safely is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox a built-in protection function is activated, which is indicated in the combined instru- ment panel with a warning symbol and the text message Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for cooling - follow the recommendation given and lower the speed and stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for a few minutes in order to allow the gear- box to cool down.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off.
Related information Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox
(p. 306)
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox (p. 306)
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 297
Driving with open tailgate When driving with the tailgate open, toxic exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car through the cargo area.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.
Related information Loading (p. 151)
Overload - starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key position II when the engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less power, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 79).
Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use func- tions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are:
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the battery voltage is low the information display shows the text Low battery charge Power save mode. The energy-saving func- tion then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventila- tion fan and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the starter battery by starting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes - battery charging is more effective during driving than run- ning the engine at idling speed while sta- tionary.
Related information Starter battery - general (p. 358)
Before a long journey Before a long journey, it makes good sense to go through the following points:
Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption (p. 396) is nor- mal.
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid).
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle (p. 327) is a legal requirement in certain countries.
Related information Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 344)
Spare wheel* (p. 322)
Lamp replacement - general (p. 348)
08 Starting and driving
08
298
Winter driving For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks in order to ensure that the car can be driven safely.
To bear in mind: Check the following in particular before the cold season:
The engine coolant (p. 391) must contain 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C. To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed.
The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre- vent condensation.
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 388).
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.
The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather
places great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.
Use washer fluid (p. 357) to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec- ommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal require- ment in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as follows:
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap by slightly press- ing in the rear part of the hatch.
Take out the flap.
Close the flap after fuelling.
For a description of locking and unlocking the fuel filler flap, see Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 177). The fuel filler flap's lock logic also follows the locking or unlocking of the keyless system and the central locking system.
Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 299)
08 Starting and driving
08
299
Fuel filler flap - manual opening The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when it cannot be opened from outside.
Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo area (same side as fuel filler flap).
Carefully pull the line back in a straight line. The flap can now be opened from outside.
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock.
Related information Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 177)
Filling up with fuel (p. 299)
Filling up with fuel The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler system. Filling is carried out as follows:
Open the fuel filler flap.
Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler opening. Take care to insert the nozzle properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two opening flaps. The nozzle must be pushed past both flaps before refuelling is started.
Do not overfill the tank but stop refuelling when the pump nozzle cuts out the first time.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.
NOTE
Avoid spilling by waiting approximately 5-8 seconds before carefully removing the nozzle once refuelling is complete.
Related information Filling with fuel - with a fuel can (p. 303)
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing (p. 298)
08 Starting and driving
08
300
Fuel - handling Fuel of a lower quality than that recom- mended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and fuel splashing in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swal- lowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any sup- plementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
Related information Economical driving (p. 304)
Fuel - petrol Petrol is used as fuel.
Only use petrol from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard.
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consump- tion.
When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter.
Fuel containing metallic additives must not be used.
Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo.
08 Starting and driving
08
}} 301
Alcohols-ethanol
IMPORTANT
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by volume ethanol is per- mitted.
EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by volume ethanol) is approved for use.
Ethanol higher than E10 (max 10 percent by volume ethanol) is not permitted. T.ex. E85 is not permitted.
Related information Economical driving (p. 304)
Fuel - handling (p. 300)
Filling up with fuel (p. 299)
Fuel - diesel Diesel is used as fuel.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc- ers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel must fulfil the EN 590, SS 155435 or JIS K 2204 standard. Diesel engines are sen- sitive to contaminants in the fuel such as met- als and a high volume of sulphur.
At low temperatures (lower than -0 C) a par- affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that are sold must be adapted for season and climate zone, but in the event of extreme weather conditions, old fuel or mov- ing between climate zones, paraffin precipi- tate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- gent and water.
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
Meet the standards EN 590, SS 155435 or JIS K 2204
have a sulphur content not exceeding 10 mg/kg
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
Special additives
Marine diesel fuel
Heating oil
FAME8 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Empty tank
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Do this before starting the engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel:
8 Diesel fuel may contain a maximum of 7% by volume of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
|| 08 Starting and driving
08
302
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch and push it in to the end posi- tion, see Key positions (p. 79).
2. Press the START button without depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
3. Wait approx. one minute. 4. To start the engine: Depress the brake
and/or clutch pedal and then press the START button again.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage:
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Service intervals for fuel filter For optimum performance, it is important to follow the service intervals for fuel filter change as well as to use genuine parts devel- oped specifically for this purpose.
Related information Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 303)
Fuel - handling (p. 300)
Economical driving (p. 304)
Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases. They are located close to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/ rhodium/palladium. These metals act as cata- lysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chemical reaction without being used up themselves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy. For more information, see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 396).
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen con- tent of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that continuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient com- bustion, and together with the three-way cat- alytic converter reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous oxides).
Related information Economical driving (p. 304)
Fuel - petrol (p. 300)
Fuel - diesel (p. 301)
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 303
Filling with fuel - with a fuel can When filling with fuel (p. 299) from a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
Statutory provisions relating to storage of reserve fuel cans in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
Take care to insert the funnel properly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe consists of two opening flaps. The funnel must be pushed past both flaps before filling is started.
Related information Locking/unlocking - fuel filler flap (p. 177)
Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 299)
Diesel particle filter (DPF) Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, which results in more efficient emission con- trol.
The particles in the exhaust gases are collec- ted in the filter during normal driving. So- called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached nor- mal operating temperature.
Filter regeneration takes place automatically and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly dur- ing regeneration.
Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approximately 80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle is shown in the combined instrument panel, and the message Soot filter full See manual is shown in the information display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or
motorway. The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
The following may arise during regenera- tion:
a smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily
fuel consumption may increase tem- porarily
a smell of burning may arise.
When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with parti- cles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced.
Related information Fuel - diesel (p. 301)
Economical driving (p. 304)
08 Starting and driving
08
304 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Economical driving Drive economically and eco-consciously by driving smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjust- ing your driving style and speed to the prevail- ing conditions.
Use the ECO Guide* (p. 68) which indi- cates how fuel-efficiently the car is being driven.
For lowest fuel consumption, activate Drive mode ECO9 which can further reduce fuel consumption.
Use the Eco Coast10 freewheel function - engine braking will cease and the car's kinetic energy can be used to freewheel for longer distances.
Drive in the highest gear possible, adap- ted to the current traffic situation and road - lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption. Use the gear shift indi- cator (p. 273)11.
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good distance to other vehicles and objects to minimise braking.
High speed results in increased fuel con- sumption - the wind resistance increases with speed.
Do not run the engine to operating tem- perature at idling speed, but rather drive with a normal load right after starting - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 400).
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump- tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
Do not use winter tyres when the winter season is over.
Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.
Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.
A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use.
Avoid driving with open windows.
For more information, see Environmental phi- losophy (p. 23) and Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 396).
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates impor- tant systems such as the power steering and brake servo.
9 Applies to automatic gearbox. 10 See "Drive mode ECO". 11 Applies to manual gearbox.
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 305
Driving with a trailer When driving with a trailer there are a number of important points to think about regarding e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information, see Weights (p. 383).
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer.
The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket com- plies with the specified maximum towball load.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For infor- mation on the tyre pressure, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 400).
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.
The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
For safety reasons, the maximum permit- ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.
Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.
Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin connector. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indi- cators are broken, the symbol for direction indicators in the combined instrument panel flashes faster than normal and the information display shows the text Trailer indicator malfunction.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are broken then the Trailer brake light malfunction text is shown.
Level control* The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car's load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.
Trailer weights For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see Towing capacity and towball load (p. 384).
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars may be certified for higher or lower towing weights than the car can actually tow.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.
Related information Towing bracket (p. 307)
Lamp replacement - general (p. 348)
08 Starting and driving
08
306 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox When driving with a trailer (p. 305) in hilly ter- rain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
Do not run the engine at higher revolu- tions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl In the event of a risk of overheating the
optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.
Related information Manual gearbox (p. 272)
Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
An automatic gearbox selects the opti- mum gear related to load and engine speed.
In the event of overheating, a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel and a text message is shown in the information display - follow the recommendation given.
Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revo- lutions.
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow driving with a trailer for cars with automatic gearbox - Powershift (p. 278).
Parking on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake.
Block the wheels with chocks when park- ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- tion D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 274)
Automatic gearbox - Powershift* (p. 278)
08 Starting and driving
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 307
Towing bracket A towing bracket means that it is possible to e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.
If the car is equipped with a detachable tow- bar, the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed carefully, see Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal (p. 308).
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:
Follow the installation instructions carefully.
The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off.
Check that the indicator window shows green.
Important checks The towbar's towball must be cleaned
and greased regularly.
WARNING
The moving parts of the detachable towbar must not be lubricated/oiled. This may reduce safety.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.
Related information Driving with a trailer (p. 305)
Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 308)
Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 307)
Detachable towbar* - storage Store the detachable towbar in the cargo area.
The detachable towbar must be stored in the foam block12 under the cargo area floor when not in use.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the detachable towbar after use and store it in the designated location in the car.
Related information Detachable towbar* - specifications
(p. 308)
Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal (p. 308)
Driving with a trailer (p. 305)
12 The figure is schematic, the foam block may have different appearances depending on the car's equipment.
08 Starting and driving
08
308 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Detachable towbar* - specifications Specifications for detachable towbar.
G 0 2 1 4 8 5
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A 887
B 79
C 881
D 441
E 109
F 306
G Side member
H Ball centre
Related information Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 308)
Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 307)
Driving with a trailer (p. 305)
Detachable towbar* - attachment/ removal The attachment/removal of the detachable towbar is performed in the following way:
Attaching
Remove the protective cover by first pressing in the catch and then pulling the cover straight back .
G 0 2 1 4 8 7
Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.
08 Starting and driving
08
}} 309
G 0 2 1 4 8 8
The indicator window must show red.
G 0 2 1 4 8 9
Insert the towball section until you hear a click.
G 0 2 1 4 9 0
The indicator window must show green.
G 0 0 0 0 0 0
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock.
G 0 2 1 4 9 4
Check that the towball section is secure by pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towball is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towball hitch, the remainder of the towbar must be clean and dry.
|| 08 Starting and driving
08
310 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G 0 2 1 4 9 5
Safety cable.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket.
Removal of removable towbar
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.
Push in the locking wheel and turn it anticlockwise until you hear a click.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towball rearward and upward.
WARNING
Secure the detachable towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 307).
Push the protective cover until it snaps tight.
Related information Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 307)
Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 308)
Driving with a trailer (p. 305)
08 Starting and driving
08
311
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA13
The trailer stability assist TSA (Trailer Stability Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake.
TSA- the function is included in the stability system (p. 185) ESC14.
Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is over- loaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.:
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind.
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole.
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the car- riageway.
The trailer stability assist function continually monitors car movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is once again stable, the TSA system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car. For more information, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - general (p. 185).
Miscellaneous Engagement of the TSA system may take place at higher speeds.
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver selects Sport mode, see Electronic stabil- ity control (ESC) - general (p. 185).
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa- tion the TSA system cannot determine
whether it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.
The ESC14 symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes when the TSA system is working.
Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 185)
13 Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar. 14 (Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control.
08 Starting and driving
08
312
Towing During towing, one vehicle is towed by another vehicle using a tow rope.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before the towing begins.
1. Activate the car's hazard warning flash- ers.
2. Attach the tow rope in the towing eye.
3. Unlock the steering lock (p. 271) by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch and giving a long press on the START/STOP ENGINE button - key position II (p. 79) is activated.
4. The remote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed.
5. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
6. Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
Check that the steering lock is unlocked before towing.
The remote control key must be in key position II - in position I all airbags are deactivated.
Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when the car is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steer- ing is considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox Prior to towing:
Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transpor- ted with the wheels rolling forward.
Do not tow cars with automatic trans- mission at speeds higher than 80 km/h (50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80 km.
Prior to towing:
Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Powershift Models with the Powershift gearbox should not be towed. If towing still has to take place, the route must be as short as possible and then with very low speed.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift trans- mission, this can be verified by checking the type designation (p. 380) on the gearbox label under the bonnet. The designa- tion MPS6 means that it is Powershift trans- mission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission.
08 Starting and driving
08
313
IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
However, the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position - not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km/h (6 mph). Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
In the event of moving a longer dis- tance than 10 km, the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road - professional recovery is recommended.
Prior to towing:
Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.
Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start, see Jump starting (p. 271).
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine.
Related information Hazard warning flashers (p. 94)
Towing eye (p. 313)
Towing eye Use the towing eye for towing a vehicle. The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.
Attaching the towing eye
1. Take out the towing eye that is stored in the foam block under the cargo area floor.
2. The cover for the towing eye's attach- ment point is opened as follows:
The cover has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side/corner at the same time - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.
3. Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
Removal 1. Unscrew and remove the towing eye after
use. Place the towing eye back in its position in the foam block.
2. Refit the cover on the bumper.
Related information Towing (p. 312)
Recovery (p. 314)
08 Starting and driving
08
314
Recovery Recovery means that the vehicle is transpor- ted away by means of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assis- tance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transpor- ted with the wheels rolling forward.
Related information Towing (p. 312)
WHEELS AND TYRES
09 Wheels and tyres
09
316
Tyres - maintenance Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear.
Driving characteristics Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.
Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indi- cate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the fric- tion capacity/characteristics gradually deteri- orate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manu- facture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the figure was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter wheels When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.
Wear and maintenance Correct tyre pressure (p. 318) results in more even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, cli- mate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns (p. 318) arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable dis- tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recom- mends the an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to cor- rect than oversteer, and leads to the car con- tinuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying down or hanging up - never standing up.
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car.
09 Wheels and tyres
09
317
Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 319)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 320)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 317)
Tyres - direction of rotation Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.
G 0 2 1 7 7 8
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).
NOTE
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make.
Follow the recommended tyre pressure (p. 318) specified in the tyre pressure table.
Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 319)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 320)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 316)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 318)
09 Wheels and tyres
09
318
Tyres - tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators show the status of the tyre's tread depth.
G 0 2 1 8 2 9
Tread wear indicators.
A tread wear indicators is a narrow elevation across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Related information Tyres - speed ratings (p. 320)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 318)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 317)
Tyres - air pressure Tyres can have different air pressures which are measured in bar.
Check the air pressure in the tyres The air pressure for the tyres should be checked every month and should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature. After several few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con- sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's driving characteristics. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and driving characteris- tics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.
Tyre pressure label
G 0 2 1 8 3 0
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressure the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. This is also specified in the tyre pressure table.
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre dimension and information about ECO pres- sure that results in improved fuel economy can be found in the printed owner's manual.
NOTE
Temperature differences change the tyre pressure.
Fuel economy, ECO pressure In order to obtain optimum fuel economy at speeds below 160 km/h (100 mph) an ECO pressure is recommended (applies to both full
09 Wheels and tyres
09
319
and light load - see the tyre pressure in the printed owner's manual).
Related information Tyres - speed ratings (p. 320)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 317)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 316)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 318)
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle. This means that there are certain combinations of wheels and tyres that are approved.
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen- sions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
7 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile
16 Rim diameter in inches
50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub)
Related information Wheel nuts (p. 321)
Tyres - dimensions The car's tyres have a certain dimension, see the examples in the table below.
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example of designation:215/55R16 97W.
205 Tyre width (mm)
50 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)
R Radial ply
17 Rim diameter in inches (")
93 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, load index (p. 320) (LI)
W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (p. 320) (SS). (In this case 270 km/h (168 mph)).
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
Related information Tyres - air pressure (p. 318)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 317)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 318)
09 Wheels and tyres
09
320
Tyres - load index Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a certain load.
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight deter- mines the load capacity required of the tyres.
Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 319)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 320)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 318)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 318)
Tyres - speed ratings Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed and therefore belongs to a particular speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with the car's top speed. The table below indicates the maximum permitted speed that applies for each speed rating (SS). The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (p. 321) (both those with metal studs and those without), where a lower speed rat- ing may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h (100 mph)). Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is speci- fied in the table.
Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (only used on winter tyres)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index (p. 320) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may over- heat.
Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 319)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 318)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 317)
09 Wheels and tyres
09
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321
Wheel nuts Wheel nuts are used to fasten the wheels at the hubs and are available in different ver- sions.
Standard wheel nuts
Bulge acorn wheel nuts
Locking wheel nuts
Tightening torque Type 1 wheel nut (steel wheel rim): 110
Nm
Type 2 wheel nut (aluminium wheel rim): 130 Nm
Type 3 Lockable wheel nut (steel/ aluminium wheel rim): 110 Nm
Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine acces- sories. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Locking wheel nuts* Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu- minium and steel rims. Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock- able wheel nuts.
Related information Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 319)
Winter tyres Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for winter road conditions.
Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu- lar dimensions. Tyre dimensions are depend- ent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe- cially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.
|| 09 Wheels and tyres
09
322 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Using snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). Never drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an acci- dent.
Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels
(p. 323)
Spare wheel* A spare wheel (Temporary spare) is used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel.
A spare wheel is only intended for use tempo- rarily and must be replaced by a normal wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of a spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all- wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table, Tyres - air pressure (p. 318).
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.
The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels
(p. 323)
Changing wheels - fitting (p. 325)
Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel* (p. 323)
Jack* (p. 327)
Warning triangle (p. 327)
Wheel nuts (p. 321)
09 Wheels and tyres
09
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 323
Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel* The spare wheel* plus jack* and wheel wrench* are stored under the floor in the cargo area.
1. Lift the rear edge of the luggage compart- ment floor (or on models with a jointed luggage compartment floor, take hold of the luggage compartment floor handle, lift and move the rear part of the floor for- wards).
2. Lift out the storage compartment* (only models with a jointed cargo area floor).
3. Lift out the lower floor (models with a join- ted luggage compartment floor only).
4. Undo the attaching screw and lift out the foam block containing the jack and tools.
5. Take hold of the far end of the spare wheel, then lift. Push the spare wheel for- wards slightly and lift it out of the storage compartment.
Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels
(p. 323)
Changing wheels - fitting (p. 325)
Jack* (p. 327)
Spare wheel* (p. 322)
Warning triangle (p. 327)
Wheel nuts (p. 321)
Changing wheels - removing wheels The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to win- ter wheels or a spare wheel.
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be changed in a trafficked location. The car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface.
1. Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.
The decal also indicates the jack's maxi- mum lift capacity at a specified lifting height.
2. Take out the wheel to be fitted as well as the tools. If it is a spare wheel being fitted then there is a package in its location containing gloves and a plastic bag for the punctured wheel.
|| 09 Wheels and tyres
09
324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground to prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for exam- ple.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers. Use the removal tool to hook in and pull off any full-wheel wheel covers. Alternatively, the wheel covers can be pulled away by hand.
5. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench* to the stop position.
Wheel wrench and towing eye.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into all threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel nuts with the intended tool.
7. Loosen the wheel nuts -1 turn anti- clockwise with the wheel wrench.
09 Wheels and tyres
09
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 325
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.
8. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. Wind up the jack so that the flange in the bodywork ends up in the notch in the head of the jack.
IMPORTANT
The ground under the jack must be firm, smooth and level.
9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the wheel.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, pas- sengers must stand in a safe place.
Related information Changing wheels - fitting (p. 325)
Changing wheels - taking out the spare wheel* (p. 323)
Spare wheel* (p. 322)
Warning triangle (p. 327)
Wheel nuts (p. 321)
Changing wheels - fitting It is important that the procedure for fitting the wheel is carried out correctly.
Installation
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, pas- sengers must stand in a safe place.
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts thoroughly.
|| 09 Wheels and tyres
09
326 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is important that the wheel nuts are tight- ened with the correct tightening torque. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel nuts.
6.
Refit any full wheel covers.
NOTE
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be positioned over the valve on the wheel rim during fitting.
Returning the tools to their places After using the tools they must be returned to their correct places in the foam block.
If the spare wheel has been used then the punctured wheel can be placed in the plastic bag contained in the package with the gloves. Return the foam block to its place and press the retaining screw down into the floor of the storage compartment.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.
Related information Changing wheels - taking out the spare
wheel* (p. 323)
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 323)
Spare wheel* (p. 322)
Warning triangle (p. 327)
Wheel nuts (p. 321)
09 Wheels and tyres
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 327
Warning triangle The warning triangle is used to warn other road users of a stationary vehicle.
Storage and folding up
Lift the floor hatch (or push the rear part of the luggage compartment floor for- wards in models with a jointed floor and then lift the lower floor) and remove the warning triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case, fold out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warn- ing triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.
Related information Spare wheel* (p. 322)
Jack* A jack is used to raise the car, e.g. when changing wheels.
Only use the original jack when fitting a spare wheel or when changing between summer and winter wheels. The jack's thread must always be well greased.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture, chang- ing to winter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the specific car model may be used to raise the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.
Related information Warning triangle (p. 327)
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 330)
09 Wheels and tyres
09
328 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
First aid kit* The first aid box contains first aid equipment.
A case containing first aid equipment is located on the left-hand side of the cargo area.
Tyre monitoring (TM)*1
The TM (Tyre Monitor) system senses the rotation speed of the tyres in order to deter- mine whether they have the correct tyre pres- sure.
System description If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diam- eter is changed and, as a result, so is its rota- tion speed. By comparing the tyres with each other the system can determine whether one or more tyres have pressure that is too low.
The system does not replace normal tyre maintenance.
Messages If the tyre pressure is too low then an indica- tor symbol ( ) illuminates in the combined instrument panel and one of the following messages is shown:
Tyre pressure low Check, adjust and calibrate
Tyre pressure system Service required
Tyre pressure system Currently unavailable
IMPORTANT
If a fault occurs in the TM system the indi- cator symbol in the combined instru- ment panel will flash for approx. 1 minute and then illuminate with a constant glow. A message is also shown in the combined instrument panel.
1 Standard in certain markets.
09 Wheels and tyres
09
}} 329
Deleting the messages 1. Check the tyre pressure in all tyres with a
tyre pressure gauge.
2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pres- sure in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between front and rear doors).
3. Recalibrate the TM system in MY CAR.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pres- sure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car.
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance.
TM calibration In order for TM system to work correctly, a reference value for the tyre pressure must be determined. This must be done each time the tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is
changed by recalibrating the system in MY CAR.
For example, the tyre pressure should be adjusted when driving with a heavy load or for high-speed driving (above 160 km/h (100 mph)). Following which, the system must be recalibrated.
Recalibration Settings are made using the centre console's controls, see MY CAR (p. 112).
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Inflate all tyres to the desired pressure in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between front and rear doors) and select key posi- tion II, see Key positions (p. 79).
3. Open the menu system MY CAR.
4. Select the Tyre monitor menu.
5. Select Calibrate tyre pressure. Press OK to confirm that the tyre pressure in all tyres has been checked and adjusted. Calibration will then start.
6. Start and drive the car. > Recalibration is carried out while the
car is being driven and can be inter- rupted at any time. If the engine is switched off while recalibration is in progress then it is resumed when the car is driven again. The system pro- vides no confirmation when the cali- bration is complete.
The new reference value applies until steps 1-5 are repeated.
NOTE
Remember that the TM system must be recalibrated at each tyre change or if the tyre pressure is changed. If new reference values are not stored then the system can- not function properly.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.
|| 09 Wheels and tyres
09
330 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
System and tyre status The current status of the system and the tyres can be checked in the centre console's screen.
1. Open the menu system MY CAR.
2. Select the Tyre monitor menu. > Status for tyre pressures is shown with
a colour code.
The status is colour-coded for each tyre in accordance with the following:
All-green: the system is operating nor- mally and the tyre pressure in all tyres is slightly above the recommended level.
Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pres- sure is too low.
All wheels yellow: two or more tyres have pressure that is too low.
All wheels grey and the message Tyre pressure system Currently unavailable: the tyre pressure system is temporarily deactivated. It may be neces- sary to drive the car for a short time above 30 km/h (20 mph) before the sys- tem becomes active again.
All wheels grey and the message Tyre pressure system Service required: an error has occurred in the system. Contact a Volvo dealer or workshop.
Related information Tyres - air pressure (p. 318)
Emergency puncture repair* The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the air pres- sure.
The emergency puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle of sealant. The sealing works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not use the puncture repair kit on tyres that have larger slits, cracks or simi- lar damage.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo.
Location The puncture repair kit is located in the foam block2 under the floor in the cargo area.
Version 1.
Version 2.
09 Wheels and tyres
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 331
Related information Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 332)
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 334)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 331)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview Overview of the component parts of the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
The parts are stored under the floor in the cargo area.
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Electrical cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Sealing fluid bottle Replace the bottle with sealing fluid before the expiration date has passed and after use. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazar- dous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natu- ral rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
WARNING
In the event of skin contact with the fluid, it must be washed off immediately with soap and plenty of water.
Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 330)
2 The foam block may have different appearances depending on the car's equipment.
09 Wheels and tyres
09
332 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Emergency puncture repair* - operation Sealing a puncture with the emergency punc- ture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
Emergency puncture repair
For information on the function of the parts, see Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 331).
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to seal the hole.
2. Detach the label for maximum permitted speed (which is fitted on one side of the compressor) and affix it to the steering wheel. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used.
3. Check that the switch is in position 0, and take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the compressor, and unscrew the cork from the bottle.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.
5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bottle holder. > The bottle and the bottle holder are
equipped with a reverse catch to pre- vent sealant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder again. Bottle removal must be performed at a work- shop, Volvo recommends an author- ised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
09 Wheels and tyres
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 333
7. Plug the electrical cable into the closest 12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sockets is in use when the compressor is operating.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contact- ing an authorised tyre centre is recom- mended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Mini- mum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre's air valve and refit the dust cap on the tyre.
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing fluid.
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
NOTE
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture dur- ing the first few rotations of the tyre.
WARNING
Make sure that nobody is standing near the car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least two metres.
15. Follow-up inspection:
Connect the air hose on the tyre's air valve again and check the tyre pressure with the pressure gauge, see Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 334).
Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 330)
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking (p. 334)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 331)
09 Wheels and tyres
09
334 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking When a tyre has been sealed with the emer- gency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK), a subsequent check must be made after approx. 3 kilometres of driving.
Check tyre pressure Take out the tyre sealing equipment. The compressor must be switched off.
1. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
Take out the air hose and screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.
If the tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa).
Release air using the pressure reduc- ing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
3. If the tyre needs to be inflated:
1. Plug the electrical cable into the clos- est 12 V socket and start the car.
2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar.
3. Switch off the compressor.
4. Remove the tyre sealing equipment, fit the protective cap on the air hose and fold the hose in the box.
Place TMK in the cargo area.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid dam- age to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends a visit to an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Related information Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 332)
09 Wheels and tyres
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 335
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the emergency puncture repair kit* The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit.
1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and take out the electrical cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
3. Plug the electrical cable into the closest 12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres- sure is too high.
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and the electrical cable.
7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
Related information Emergency puncture repair* (p. 330)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 331)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 337
Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- ble, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Related information Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 348)
Book service and repair*1
Manage service, repair and booking informa- tion directly in your Internet-connected car.
This service1 provides a convenient way to book a service and workshop visit directly in the car. Car information is sent to your dealer, who can prepare the workshop visit. The dealer will contact you to schedule an appointment time. For certain markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled appoint- ment time as it approaches and the naviga- tion system2 can also guide you to the work- shop when the time comes.
Before the service can be used
Volvo ID and my profile Register a Volvo ID. For more information
and how to create a Volvo ID, see Volvo ID (p. 22).
Log in to the owner portal My Volvo, go to your profile and carry out the following:
1. Check that the car is connected to your profile.
2. Check that your contact information is correct.
3. Select the Volvo dealer you want to con- tact for service and repair.
4. Choose preferred communication chan- nel (phone). Booking information is always sent to the car and to you via email.
Prerequisite for booking from car To send and receive booking information
from and to the car, the car must be con- nected to the Internet, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement for information about how to connect the car to the Inter- net.
Since the booking information is sent over your private phone subscription, you will be asked whether you want to send the information. The question is asked once and then applies to the selected connection for a limited time.
For the service to work and for the sys- tem to communicate via the car's screen, notifications/pop-up messages must be accepted. In the normal view for the MY CAR source, press OK/MENU and then Service & repair Display notifications.
Using the service All menus and settings are accessed from the normal view in MY CAR by pressing OK/ MENU and then Service & repair.
When it is time for service, and in some cases when the car is in need of repair, this is noti-
1 Applies to certain markets. 2 Applies to Sensus Navigation.
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
338
fied in the combined instrument panel (p. 64) and via a pop-up menu in the screen.
Service message in the screen.
Meaning of the answer options in the screen's pop-up menu:
Yes - A booking enquiry is sent to your dealer who then comes back with a booking proposal. The service lamp and service message in the combined instru- ment panel are extinguished.
No - No more pop-up messages will be shown in the screen. The message in the combined instrument panel remains. After this option has been selected, it is possi- ble to start the manual booking in the car, see below.
Postpone - The pop-up menu is shown the next time the car is started.
Book a service or repair manually1
1. Press the MY CAR button in the centre console and select Service & repair Dealer information Request service or repair. > Vehicle data is sent automatically to
your dealer.
2. The dealer sends a booking proposal to the car.
3. Accept or request a new booking pro- posal.
After the booking has been accepted the booking information is stored in the car, see My bookings. The car will automatically com- municate with you via the screen by means of reminders about the booking and guide you to the workshop visit.
You can also book a workshop visit via My Volvo. Go to "My bookings" and select "Update" in order to gain access to bookings from My Volvo.
My bookings1
Show booking information in the car's screen. Accept or request a new booking proposal.
Select Service & repair My bookings.
Call the dealer1
With a Bluetooth phone connected to the car, you can call your dealer. For connecting the phone, see the Sensus Infotainment sup- plement.
Select Service & repair Dealer information Call dealer.
Using the navigation system1, 2 Enter your workshop as destination or way- point in the navigation system.
Select Service & repair Dealer information Set single destination.
Select Service & repair Dealer information Add as waypoint.
Sending vehicle data1
Vehicle data are sent to a central Volvo data- base (not your dealer) from which Volvo deal- ers can retrieve vehicle information using the car's identification number (VIN3). The num- ber is printed in the car's service and war- ranty booklet, alternatively inside the wind- screen's bottom left-hand corner.
Select Service & repair Send car data.
1 Applies to certain markets. 2 Applies to Sensus Navigation. 3 Vehicle Identification Number
10 Maintenance and service
10
339
Booking information and vehicle data When you decide to book a service from your car, the booking information and vehicle data will be sent. Vehicle data information consists of information within the following areas:
service requirement
function status
fluid levels
Meter reading
the car's vehicle identification number (VIN3)
The car's software version.
Related information Volvo ID (p. 22)
3 Vehicle Identification Number
10 Maintenance and service
10
340
Raising the car When raising the car it is important that the jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recom- mended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment.
10 Maintenance and service
10
341
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a front workshop jack then this must be positioned under one of the two lifting points furthest in under the car. If the car is raised with a rear workshop jack then it must be positioned under one of the lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.
If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be positioned under the outer lifting points (jack- ing points). Alternatively, the inner lifting points can be used at the front.
Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels
(p. 323)
10 Maintenance and service
10
342
Bonnet - opening and closing The bonnet can be opened when the handle in the passenger compartment has been turned clockwise and the lock by the radiator grille has been moved to the left.
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the left-hand side.
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees clockwise. You will hear when the catch releases.
Move the catch to the left and open the bonnet. (The catch hook is located between the headlamp and radiator grille, see illustration.)
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.
Related information Engine compartment - checking (p. 343)
Engine compartment - overview (p. 342)
Engine compartment - overview The overview shows some service-related components.
Engine compartment
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Filling washer fluid
Radiator
Filling engine oil
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side)
Starter battery
Relay and fuse box
Air filter
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} 343
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage and output. The voltage in the ignition sys- tem is highly dangerous. The car's electri- cal system must always be in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 79).
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in key position II or when the engine is hot.
Related information Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 342)
Engine compartment - checking (p. 343)
Engine compartment - checking Some oils and fluids should be checked at regular intervals.
Regular checking Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
Coolant
Engine oil
Washer fluid
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start automati- cally some after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
Related information Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 342)
Engine compartment - overview (p. 342)
Coolant - level (p. 346)
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 344)
Washer fluid - filling (p. 357)
Engine oil - general An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied.
Volvo recommends:
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
344
When driving under adverse conditions, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 388).
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo work- shop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the combined instrument panel's warning symbol for low oil pressure is used
. Other variants have an oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via the instru-
ment's warning symbol and display texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord- ance with the intervals specified in the Serv- ice and Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con- ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade; see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 388).
For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 389).
Related information Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 344)
Engine oil - checking and filling The oil level is detected with the electronic oil level sensor.
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} 345
Filler pipe4.
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up between service intervals.
No action needs to be taken on engine oil level until a message is shown in the com- bined instrument panel's display, see the fol- lowing illustration.
Message and graphic in the display. The left- hand display is shown in the digital combined instrument panel and the right-hand in the ana- logue.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 109).
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil level may be too high.
IMPORTANT
If notified of low oil level, only fill with the volume specified, for example, 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched off and on level ground before the oil level indication is correct.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani- fold due to the risk of fire.
4 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
346
Measuring the oil level If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the following sequence.
1. Activate key position II; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 79).
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Oil level. > You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
For more information on menu naviga- tion, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 109).
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil level are not met (time after engine shut- down, the car's inclination, outside tem- perature, etc.) then the message Not available will be shown. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems.
Related information Engine oil - general (p. 343)
Key positions - functions at different lev- els (p. 79)
Coolant - level The coolant cools the internal combustion engine to the correct operating temperature. The heat that is transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used to heat the passen- ger compartment.
Checking the level The coolant level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the cooling system is not filled sufficiently, exces- sively high temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
NOTE
Check the coolant level regularly when the engine is cold.
Filling
When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant con- centrate.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.
10 Maintenance and service
10
347
IMPORTANT
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.
Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.
When changing coolant/replacing cooling system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready- mixed coolant.
The engine must only be run with a well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding water quality; see Coolant - grade and vol- ume (p. 391).
Brake and clutch fluid - level Brake and clutch fluid level should be between the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.
Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- voir. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reser- voir. Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi- cal climates with high humidity.
For capacities and recommended brake fluid grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume (p. 393).
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur- ther before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo recommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Filling
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks, which are located on the inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
10 Maintenance and service
10
348
Climate control system - fault tracing and repair The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised work- shop.
Fault tracing and repair The air conditioning system contains fluores- cent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used during leak detection.
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres- surised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Related information Volvo service programme (p. 337)
Lamp replacement - general Lamp replacement can be carried out for bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer to a workshop.
The bulbs are specified (p. 354). The follow- ing list contains locations of bulbs and other light sources that are specialised, such as LED5 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing for some other reason, except at a work- shop6:
active xenon headlamps - ABL (xenon lamps)
position lamps, front7
daytime running light lamps7
side direction indicators, door mirrors7
approach lighting, door mirrors
interior and cargo area lighting
glovebox lighting
Position lamps, rear
side marker lamps rear
brake light above the rear windscreen
number plate lighting.
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme cau- tion because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.
WARNING
The cars electrical system must be in key position 0 when replacing bulbs; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 79).
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the bro- ken bulb has been replaced then we rec- ommend visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
5 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 6 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 7 Certain variants
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 349
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have conden- sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor- mal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.
Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 349)
Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 352)
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - location of front lamps The overview shows the location of the lamps at the front.
Position lamps (p. 352) (LED in Xenon headlamps)
Main beam in Xenon headlamps (p. 351) / Extra main beam in Xenon headlamps (p. 351)
Dipped beam in halogen headlamps (p. 350) / Xenon lamps in Xenon head- lamps (p. 348)
Indicator (p. 351)
Daytime running lights (p. 352) (LED* or bulb depending on variant)
Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 348)
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - headlamps All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment. First loosen and remove the whole headlamp.
1. Lift out the bonnet stop.
2. Loosen the screw with a Torx tool, size T30.
3. Turn the locking pin anticlockwise.
Pull out the locking pin.
4. Release the headlamp by alternately tilting and pulling it out.
IMPORTANT
Take care when lifting out the headlamp so as not to damage any parts.
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
350
5. Press down the catch.
Unplug the connector.
Place the headlight on a soft surface so as not to scratch the lens.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector.
6. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.
The headlamp must be fitted and the contact fitted correctly before switching on the lights or changing key position.
Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 348)
Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 349)
Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs (p. 350)
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by releasing the headlamp's larger cover.
1. Press the hooks together.
Angle out the cover.
2. Replace the relevant bulb as instructed.
Related information Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 349)
Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p. 350)
Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 351)
Lamp replacement - extra main beam (p. 351)
Lamp replacement - dipped beam The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 349).
2. Undo the cover (p. 350).
3. Press the bulb holder upwards until it releases.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
10 Maintenance and service
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 351
Lamp replacement - main beam The main beam bulb is fitted inside the head- lamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 349).
2. Undo the cover (p. 350).
3. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - extra main beam The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 349).
2. Undo the cover (p. 350).
3. Press the bulb holder upwards until it detaches.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - direction indicators front The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside the headlamp's smaller cover.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 349).
2. Undo the cover.
3. Push in the catch.
Pull out the bulb holder.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
10 Maintenance and service
10
352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lamp replacement - position lamps, front The position lamp's bulb holder is located on the side of the headlamp.
NOTE
Not applicable to cars with Xenon head- lamps* as these are equipped with LED lamps.
1. Detach the headlamp (p. 349).
2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - daytime running lights The daytime running light bulb is fitted inside the bumper's cover.
NOTE
Only applies to daytime running lights with bulbs.
1. Undo the cover.
2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps The overview shows the location of the lamps at the rear.
Brake light (LED)
Position lamps (LED)
Brake light (p. 353)
Side marker lamps (LED)
Indicator (p. 353)
Reversing lamp (p. 353)
Fog lamp (driver's side) (p. 353)
Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 348)
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} 353
Lamp replacement - direction indicators rear, brake lights and reversing lamp Bulbs for rear direction indicators, brake lights and reversing lamps are replaced from inside the cargo area.
1. Remove the hatch in the upholstery (1) on the same side as the defective bulb.
2. Press the catch sideways.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Related information Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 352)
Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - rear fog lamp The bulb for the rear fog lamp is fitted in the bumper's bulb holder.
Insert (approx.20 mm) a blunt, knife-like object, e.g. a table knife, at the triangle.
Carefully prise until the lug releases.
IMPORTANT
Take care not to damage any parts.
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
354
Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Pull out the bulb holder.
3. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the lamp lenses.
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and gently prize up the lug on the edge.
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lens.
3. Using needle-nose pliers, pull the bulb straight out to the side. Do not squeeze too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the bulb glass could break.
4. Replace the bulb and put back the parts in reverse order.
Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 354)
Lamps - specifications The specifications apply to bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer to a workshop.
Lighting [W]A Type
Dipped beamB 55 H7 LL
Main beamB 65 H9
Additional main beamC
55 H7 LL
Front direction indicators
21 HY21W
Position lamps, frontB
5 W5W LL
Daytime running lightsD
19 PW19W
Side direction indi- cators, door mir- rorsD
5 WY5W LL
Direction indica- tors, rear
21 PY21W LL
Brake light 21 P21W LL
Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} 355
Lighting [W]A Type
Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL
Vanity mirror light- ing
1.2 T5 Socket W2x4.6d
A Watt B Cars with halogen headlights C Cars with xenon headlights D Certain variants
Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 348)
Lamp replacement - location of front lamps (p. 349)
Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 352)
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting (p. 354)
Wiper blades The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving.
The windscreen wiper blades must be in serv- ice position when they are to be replaced.
Service position
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off ice from the wind- screen, for example) they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down.
1. Insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch8 and briefly press the START/ STOP ENGINE button to set the car's electrical system to key position I. For detailed information on key positions, see Key positions - functions at different lev- els (p. 79).
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button again to set the cars electrical system in key position 0.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk switch up and hold it in position for approx. 1 second. > The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
The wipers return to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the cars electrical sys- tem to key position I (or when the car is started).
8 Not required in cars with keyless start and lock system.
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
356
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the wind- screen before the wipers are activated. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
Replacing the wiper blades Fold up the wiper arm when it is in serv- ice position. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen.
The wipers return from service position to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the cars electrical system to key position I (or when the car is started).
G 0 2 1 7 6 3
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.
WARNING
Since the car is equipped with airbag Pedestrian Airbag Volvo recommends that the wiper arms should be genuine parts and that only genuine parts are used for them.
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} 357
Replacing the wiper blades, rear window
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position. Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see Car wash (p. 372).
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.
Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 357)
Washer fluid - filling Washer fluid is used for cleaning the head- lamps and windows. Washer fluid with anti- freeze must be used when the temperature is below freezing point.
Topping up the washer fluid takes place by opening the blue cap.
The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.
NOTE
When there is approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remaining in the reservoir, a message to top up the washer fluid will be shown in the combined instrument panel, together with the symbol .
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
358
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recom- mended by Volvo - with frost protection dur- ing cold weather and below freezing point.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equiva- lent with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral water).
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the temperature is below freezing to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres.
Cars without headlamp washing: 3.2 litres.
Related information Wiper blades (p. 355)
Wipers and washers (p. 101)
Starter battery - general The starter battery is used to drive the starter motor and other electrical equipment in the car.
The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat- tery.
The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
Never disconnect the starter battery when the engine is running.
Check that the cables to the starter bat- tery are correctly connected and properly tightened.
The following table shows specifications for the starter battery.
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A)
720C
760D or 800D
Size , LWH (mm)
278175190C
278175190D or 315175190D
Capacity (Ah) 70C
70D or 80D
A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes. C Manual gearbox. D Automatic gearbox. The specification is dependent on the
model variant.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery, in cars with Start/Stop function, a battery of the correct type must be fitted, EFB9 in cars with manual gearbox and AGM10 in cars with automatic gearbox.
When replacing the support battery, a bat- tery of AGM type must be fitted.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and type as the orig- inal battery (see the label on the battery).
9 Enhanced Flooded Battery. 10 Absorbed Glass Mat.
10 Maintenance and service
10
359
NOTE
The battery's container size should be consistent with the original battery's dimensions.
The battery's height is different depending on size.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is con- nected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery or the support battery (p. 361), only use a mod- ern battery charger with controlled charg- ing voltage. Fast charging function must not be used since it may damage the bat- tery.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for info- tainment system may be temporarily dis- engaged, and/or the message in the com- bined instrument panel's information dis- play about the starter battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external battery or battery charger:
The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external bat- tery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the ground- ing point.
See Jump starting (p. 271) for a descrip- tion of how the cable clamps must be attached.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decrea- ses gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold fur- ther limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is rec- ommended or that the battery is con- nected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.
Related information Battery - symbols (p. 360)
Starter battery - replacement (p. 360)
10 Maintenance and service
10
360
Battery - symbols There are information and warning symbols on the batteries.
Symbols on the batteries
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the owner's manual for the car.
Store the battery out of the reach of children.
The battery contains cor- rosive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recy- cling.
NOTE
An expended starter battery or support battery must be recycled in an environ- mentally safe manner since it contains lead.
Related information Starter battery - general (p. 358)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 361)
Starter battery - replacement The starter battery should be replaced by an authorised workshop.
Volvo recommends that you allow an author- ised workshop to replace the batteries - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more information on the car's starter bat- tery, see Starter battery - general (p. 358) and Jump starting (p. 271).
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 361
Battery - Start/Stop Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the starter battery, are equipped with a sup- port battery.
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equip- ped with two 12 V batteries - one extra pow- erful starter battery for starting and one sup- port battery that helps during the Start/Stop function's starting sequence.
For more information on the Start/Stop func- tion, see Start/Stop* (p. 281).
For more information on the car's starter bat- tery, see Jump starting (p. 271).
The following table shows specifications for the support battery.
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A)
120C
170D
Size , LWH (mm) 15090106C
15090130D
Capacity (Ah) 8C
10D
A According to EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes. C Manual gearbox in combination with Start/Stop function
that only auto-stops when the car is completely stationary. D Others.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery, in cars with Start/Stop function, a battery of the correct type must be fitted, EFB11 in cars with manual gearbox and AGM12 in cars with automatic gearbox.
When replacing the support battery, a bat- tery of AGM type must be fitted.
NOTE
The higher the current take-off in the car, the more the alternator must be working and the batteries charging = Increased fuel consumption.
When the capacity of the starter bat- tery has fallen below the lowest per- missible level then the Start/Stop func- tion is disengaged.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to high current take-off means:
The engine starts automatically13 without the driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual gearbox).
The engine starts automatically without the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake pedal (automatic gearbox).
11 Enhanced Flooded Battery. 12 Absorbed Glass Mat. 13 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
362
Location of the batteries
Starter battery14
Support battery
The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal starter battery. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/Stop function may tempo- rarily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger:
The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external bat- tery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the ground- ing point.
See Jump starting (p. 271) for a descrip- tion of how the cable clamps must be attached.
NOTE
If the battery has become so discharged that everything is "black" and in principle the car does not have all the normal elec- trical functions and the engine is subse- quently started using an external battery or battery charger, then the Start/Stop func- tion will be activated. It will then be possi- ble for the engine to be auto-stopped but in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may fail to auto-start the engine due to inadequate capacity in the battery.
The battery must first be charged in order to ensure a successful auto-start after an auto-stop. At an outside temperature of +15 C the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour. At a lower outside tem- perature a charging time of 3-4 hours is recommended. The recommendation is that the battery is charged using an exter- nal battery charger.
If this is not possible then the recommen- dation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been adequately recharged.
For more information on charging the starter battery, see Starter battery - gen- eral (p. 358).
Related information Battery - symbols (p. 360)
14 See Starter battery - general (p. 358) for a detailed description of the starter battery.
10 Maintenance and service
10
363
Electrical system The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alterna- tor.
The size, type and performance of the starter battery depend on the car's equipment and function.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and type as the orig- inal battery (see the label on the battery).
Related information Starter battery - replacement (p. 360)
Starter battery - general (p. 358)
Fuses - general All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from dam- age by short circuiting or overloading.
If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.
Location of central electrical units
Fuse box locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the fuse box under the glovebox changes sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Under the right-hand front seat
Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 364)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 367)
Fuses - under the right-hand front seat (p. 370)
10 Maintenance and service
10
364
Fuses - in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things.
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box also provides space for several spare fuses.
Replacing fuses The fuses can be accessed following the removal of the cover fitted on the starter bat- tery and the cover for the electrical distribu- tion unit.
Removing the covers Fold out the locking catches that are fitted on the sides of the cover on the starter battery.
Lift the cover straight up.
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 365
Fold out the locking catch that is fitted on the side of the electrical distribution unit.
Rotate the cover upward until the lock lugs (1) are released.
Fold the cover toward the engine to access the fuses.
Refitting the covers Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Positions The label on the inside of the cover shows the positions of the fuses.
Fuses 7-18 and 46 are of the "JCASE" type and should be replaced by a work- shop15.
Fuses 19-45 and 47-48 are of "Mini Fuse" type.
Function [A]A
ABS pump 40
ABS valves 30
Headlamp washers* 20
Ventilation fan 40
- -
Primary fuse for fuses 32-36 30
- -
Heated windscreen, right- hand side*
40
- -
Heated windscreen, left-hand side*
40
Function [A]A
Parking heater* 20
Windscreen wipers 20
Central electronic module, ref- erence voltage, support bat- tery
5
Horn 15
Brake light 5
- -
Headlamp control 5
Internal relay coils 5
12 V socket, tunnel console front
15
Transmission control module 15
- -
12 V socket, tunnel console rear
15
- -
Engine Control Module (ECM) 5
15 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
366 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Function [A]A
Power seat, right* 20
Lambda-sonds; Relay coil in relay for cooling fan
15
Vacuum regulators; Valves; Control module, radiator roller cover; Control module, spoiler roller cover (diesel); Compres- sor A/C; Solenoid for engine oil pump; Cooling valve for cli- mate control system (diesel); Glow control module (diesel); Relay coils in relays for Start/ Stop functions
10
EGR valve (diesel); EVAP valve (petrol); Engine control mod- ule; Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); Cool- ing pump for EGR (diesel)
15
Ignition coils (petrol) 15
Diesel filter heater (diesel) 25
Engine Control Module (ECM) 15
ABS 5
Engine control module; Trans- mission control module; Air- bags
7.5
Function [A]A
Headlamp levelling* 10
Electric control servo 5
Central electronic module 15
- -
- -
Collision warning system 5
Accelerator pedal sensor 5
- -
- -
Coolant pump (when no park- ing heater is available)
10
A Ampere
Related information Fuses - under glovebox (p. 367)
Fuses - under the right-hand front seat (p. 370)
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} 367
Fuses - under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect the airbag and passenger compartment lighting func- tions, amongst other things.
On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.
Replacing fuses The fuses can be accessed when a protective cover has been removed from the fuse box.
Cover removal Take hold of the recess and pull until the locking lugs in the lower edge of the cover are released from the fuse box.
Remove the cover.
NOTE
A relatively large amount of tensile force is required to release the locking lugs at the top edge of the cover from the electrical distribution unit.
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
368 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Cover refitting
Guide in the lower lugs.
Turn the cover upwards until the upper lugs engage.
NOTE
Make sure that the upper locking lugs are seated properly in the grooves of the elec- trical distribution unit.
Positions The fuses are of "Mini Fuse" type.
Function [A]A
Fuel pump 20
- -
Rear window wiper 15
Function [A]A
Display in roof console (Seat- belt reminder/Indicator for air- bag on the front passenger seat)
5
Interior lighting, Controls in roof console for front reading lamps and passenger com- partment lighting; Power seats*
7.5
Power operated roller blind for glass roof*
10
Rain sensor*; Dimming, inte- rior rearview mirror*; Moisture sensor*
5
Collision warning system* 5
- -
Unlocking, tailgateB 10
- -
Reserve position 3, constant voltage
5
Steering lock 15
Combined instrument panel 5
Function [A]A
Central locking system, fuel filler flapC
10
Climate panel 7.5
Steering wheel module 7.5
Siren*; Data link connector OBDII
5
Main beam 15
- -
Reversing lamp 7.5
Windscreen wipersD; Rear windscreen wiperD
20
Immobiliser 5
Reserve position 1, constant voltage
15
Reserve position 2, constant voltage
20
Movement detector for alarm*; Remote receiver
5
Windscreen wipersE; Rear windscreen wiperE
20
10 Maintenance and service
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 369
Function [A]A
Central locking system, fuel filler flapF
10
Unlocking, tailgateG 10
Electric additional heater*; Button seat heating rear*
7.5
Airbags; Pedestrian airbag* 7.5
Reserve position 4, constant voltage
7.5
- -
- -
A Ampere B See also fuse 84. C See also fuse 83. D See also fuse 82. E See also fuse 77. F See also fuse 70. G See also fuse 65.
Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 364)
Fuses - under the right-hand front seat (p. 370)
10 Maintenance and service
10
370 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Fuses - under the right-hand front seat Fuses under the right-hand front seat protect the infotainment system and seat heating, amongst other things.
On the inside of the cover for the fuse box in the engine compartment there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses.
Positions Fuses 24-28 are of "JCASE" type and
should be replaced by a workshop16.
Fuses 1-23 and 29-46 are of "Mini Fuse" type.
Function [A]A
- -
Keyless system* 10
Door handles, keyless system* 5
Control panel, left front door 25
16 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
10 Maintenance and service
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 371
Function [A]A
Control panel, right front door 25
Control panel, left rear door 25
Control panel, right rear door 25
Primary fuse for fuses 12-16: Infotainment
25
Power seat, left* 20
- -
Internal relay coil 5
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
12 V socket, cargo area 15
- -
- -
- -
Function [A]A
- -
- -
Trailer socket 2* 20
Audio control unit (amplifier)* 30
- -
Trailer socket 1* 40
Rear window defroster 30
- -
BLIS* 5
Parking assistance* 5
Parking camera* 5
- -
- -
Seat heating, front driver's side
15
Seat heating, front passenger side
15
- -
Function [A]A
- -
- -
Seat heating, rear right* 15
Seat heating, rear left* 15
- -
- -
- -
- -
Audio control module (ampli- fier)*, signal for diagnosis; Audio control module or Con- trol module SensusB; Infotain- ment control module or ScreenB; Digital radio*; TV*
15
Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5
A Ampere B Certain model variants.
Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 364)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 367)
10 Maintenance and service
10
372
Car wash The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.
Handwashing Remove bird droppings from the paint-
work as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discol- our paintwork very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun!
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have conden- sation on the inside of the lens. This is nor- mal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.
Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom- mended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand over the first few months. This is because the paint is more delicate when it is new.
IMPORTANT
If the car is painted with a matte clear coat, never use a washing program that finishes with hot wax treatment.
High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction causes the brake linings to warm up and dry. Do the same
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} 373
thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.
For cleaning:
Set the wiper blades to the service posi- tion; see Wiper blades (p. 355).
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, such as glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic, rubber and on parts painted in matte or semi-matte version.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.
Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.
Related information Polishing and waxing (p. 373)
Cleaning the interior (p. 375)
Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 374)
Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spi- rit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic, rubber and on parts painted in matte or semi-matte version.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
374 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.
Matte clear coat When the car is painted in a matte clear coat, the following must be considered in order to avoid paint damage due to incorrect treat- ment.
IMPORTANT
Never polish a matte clear coat. Polishing leads to the paint becoming shiny.
Do not use paint cleaner, grinding agents, polishing products or sheen preservation, e.g. wax. These products are only intended for glossy surfaces. If they are used on matte paint then there will be sig- nificant damage to the surfaces (glossy spots).
IMPORTANT
If wax gets onto the matte paint sur- face then it must be removed immedi- ately using standard type white ben- zene.
Make sure you do not get resin, grease or oil on the car's paint. They may leave residues. Remove immediately using standard type white benzene.
Proceed with caution and do not press too hard on the painted surface.
Related information Car wash (p. 372)
Water and dirt-repellent coating The windows are treated with a surface coa- ting that improves visibility in difficult weather conditions.
Water and dirt-repellent coating* There is natural wear of the water- repellent coating.
Maintenance:
Never use products such as car wax, degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this could ruin their water-repellent prop- erties.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scra- pers.
Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recom- mended in order to maintain the water- repellent properties on the side windows. This should be used first after three years and then each year.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the heating to remove ice from the door mirrors; see Win- dows and rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 106).
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} 375
Related information Car wash (p. 372)
Rustproofing The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members, cavities, closed sections and side doors.
Inspection and maintenance The car's anti-corrosion protection does not normally need to be maintained, but keeping the car clean always helps to further reduce the risk of corrosion. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solutions must always be avoided on the glossy trim components. Any stone chips should be rectified as soon as they are dis- covered.
Related information Paint damage (p. 377)
Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vac- uuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.
IMPORTANT
Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g. dark jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to clean and treat these parts of the upholstery as soon as possible.
Never use strong solvents such as washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to clean the interior, since this may damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials.
Never spray the cleaning agent directly onto components that have electrical buttons and controls. Wipe them instead using a moistened cloth con- taining the cleaning agent.
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.
Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery Volvo offers a comprehensive fabric care product for fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the properties
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
376
of the upholstery. The fabric care product is available for purchase from a Volvo dealer.
Leather upholstery Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to pre- serve its original appearance.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that changes and acquires a beautiful patina over time. Regular cleaning and treatment are required in order that the properties and col- ours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes, for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, pre- serves the leather's protective coating.
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends the cleaning and application of the protective cream once to four times per year (or more if required). The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available for purchase from a Volvo dealer.
Leather steering wheel Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic. Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recom- mended for cleaning the leather steering wheel.
Interior plastic, metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from a Volvo dealer, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning.
Seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A spe- cial textile cleaning agent is available from a Volvo dealer. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.
Inlay mats and floor mat Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats must be cleaned with agents recom- mended by a Volvo dealer.
Related information Car wash (p. 372)
10 Maintenance and service
10
}} 377
Paint damage Paint is an important part of the car's rust- proofing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paint- work damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
IMPORTANT
When the car is painted in a matte clear coat:
Only allow an authorised workshop to carry out paint repairs. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Touching up minor paintwork damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paint- work should be rectified immediately.
Materials that may be needed
Primer17 - a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e.g. plastic- coated bumpers.
base coat and clear coat - are available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks18.
Masking tape.
fine sand paper17.
Colour code The label for colour code is located on the car's door pillar and is visible when the right- hand rear door is opened.
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used. For product label location, see Type designa- tions (p. 380).
Repair minor paintwork damage such as stone chips and scratches
G 0 2 1 8 3 2
Before work is begun, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly.
17 If required. 18 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
|| 10 Maintenance and service
10
378
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to pro- tect the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with basecoat and clearcoat as soon as the surface has been cleaned.
Related information Rustproofing (p. 375)
SPECIF ICATIONS
11 Specifications
11
380
Type designations Type designation, vehicle identification num- ber, etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be read on a label in the car.
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
11 Specifications
11
381
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili- tate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification number, permissible maximum weights and code designation for exterior colour and type approval number. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Label for A/C system.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial num- ber.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Car's identification number (VIN Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.
Related information Weights (p. 383)
Engine specifications (p. 386)
11 Specifications
11
382
Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table.
V40.
Dimensions mm
A Wheelbase 2647
B Length 4369
C Load length, floor, folded rear seat 1508
D Load length, floor 684
E Height 1420
F Load height 532
Dimensions mm
G Front track 1546A
1551B
1559C
H Rear track 1533A
1538B
1546C
I Load width, floor 960
Dimensions mm
J Width 1802
K Width including door mirrors 2041
L Width including folded-in door mirrors 1857
A Offset 52.5 mm. B Offset 50 mm. C Offset 46 mm.
11 Specifications
11
383
Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (p. 384) (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load- ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Load carrier, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven engine block heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own partic- ular car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.
For information on label location, see Type des- ignations (p. 380).
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
Related information Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 384)
11 Specifications
11
384
Towing capacity and towball load
Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables.
Max. weight braked trailer
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
V40
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T2 B4204T38 Manual, M66 1500 75
T2 B4154T5 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75
T3 B4204T37 Manual, M66 1500 75
T3 B4154T4 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75
T3 B4154T6 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75
T4 B4204T19 Manual, M66 1500 75
T4 B4204T19 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75
T5 B4204T11 Automatic, TG-81SC 1500 75
T5 B4204T15 Automatic, TG-81SC 1500 75
T5 B4204T41 Automatic, TG-81SC 1500 75
D2 D4204T8 Manual, M66 1500 75
D2 D4204T8 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75
D3 D4204T9 Manual, M66 1500 75
D3 D4204T9 Automatic, TF-71SC 1500 75
11 Specifications
11
385
V40
Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
D4 D4204T14 Manual, M66 1500 75
D4 D4204T14 Automatic, TG-81SC 1500 75
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 380).
Max. weight unbraked trailer
V40
Engine
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
D2 (D4204T8)A 650 50
other 700 50
A Only applies for the low-emissions 82 grams CO2/km version. Certain markets.
Related information Weights (p. 383)
Driving with a trailer (p. 305)
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA (p. 311)
11 Specifications
11
386
Engine specifications Engine specifications (output etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
V40
Engine
Engine codeA
Output (kW/rpm)
Output (hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/ rpm)
No. of cylinders
Bore (mm)
Stroke (mm)
Swept volume (litres)
Com- pression
ratio
T2 B4154T5 90/5000 122/5000 220/1600-3500 4 82.0 70.9 1.498 10.5:1
T2 B4204T38 90/5000 122/5000 220/1100-3500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 11.3:1
T3 B4154T4 112/5000 152/5000 250/17004000 4 82.0 70.9 1.498 10.5:1
T3 B4204T37 112/5000 152/5000 250/13004000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 11.3:1
T3 B4154T6 112/5000 152/5000 250/17004000 4 82.0 70.9 1.498 8,8:1
T4 B4204T19 140/4700 190/4700 300/13004000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 11.3:1
T5 B4204T11 180/5500 245/5500 350/15004800 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.8:1
T5 B4204T15 162/5500 220/5500 350/15004000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.8:1
T5 B4204T41 180/5500 245/5500 350/15004800 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 8,6:1
D2 D4204T8 88/3750 120/3750 280/1500-2250 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 16.0:1
D3 D4204T9 110/3750 150/3750 320/1750-3000 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 16.0:1
D4 D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 400/1750-2500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 15.8:1
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 380).
11 Specifications
11
387
Related information Coolant - grade and volume (p. 391)
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 389)
11 Specifications
11
388
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.
Check the oil level (p. 344), more frequently for long journeys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 C or hotter than +40 C
The above also apply to shorter driving dis- tances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.
Volvo recommends:
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo work- shop.
Related information Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 389)
Engine oil - general (p. 343)
11 Specifications
11
}} 389
Engine oil - grade and volume Recommended engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.
Volvo recommends:
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
|| 11 Specifications
11
390
V40
Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T2 B4154T5 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0w20 approx. 5.6
T2 B4204T38 approx. 5.9
T3 B4154T4 approx. 5.6
T3 B4154T6 approx. 5.6
T3 B4204T37 approx. 5.9
T4 B4204T19 approx. 5.9
T5 B4204T11 approx. 5.9
T5 B4204T15 approx. 5.9
T5 B4204T41 approx. 5.9
D2 D4204T8 approx 5.2
D3 D4204T9 approx 5.2
D4 D4204T14 approx 5.2
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 380).
Related information Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 388)
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 344)
11 Specifications
11
391
Coolant - grade and volume Approved coolant volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% water2, see the pack- aging.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
V40
EngineA
Volume
(litres)
T2 B4154T5 7,5 (7,8B)
T2 B4204T38
T3 B4154T4
T3 B4154T6
T3 B4204T37
T4 B4204T19
T5 B4204T11
T5 B4204T15
T5 B4204T41
V40
EngineA
Volume
(litres)
D2 D4204T8
8,0 (8,4B)D3 D4204T9
D4 D4204T14
A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 380).
B Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater.
Related information Coolant - level (p. 346)
2 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
11 Specifications
11
392
Transmission fluid - grade and volume The prescribed transmission fluid and volume for each respective gearbox alternative can be read in the table.
Manual gearbox
Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
M66 approx. 1.45 BOT 350M3
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid
TF-71SC approx 6.8 AW1
TG-81SC approx. 6.6A
approx. 7.5B AW1
A Petrol engines B Diesel engines
NOTE
The gearbox oil does not need to be changed under normal driving conditions. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.
Related information Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 388)
Type designations (p. 380)
11 Specifications
11
393
Brake fluid - grade and volume The medium in a hydraulic brake system is called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pressure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in turn act on a mechanical brake.
Prescribed grade: DOT 4
Volume: 0.6 litres
Related information Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 347)
11 Specifications
11
394
Fuel tank - volume Fuel tank volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.
V40
Engine
Volume (litres) Prescribed grade
Petrol approx. 62 Fuel - petrol (p. 300)
Diesel approx. 62 (approx. 40A) Fuel - diesel (p. 301)
A Only applies for the D2 (D4204T8) low-emissions 82 grams CO2/km version. Certain markets.
Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 299)
Engine specifications (p. 386)
11 Specifications
11
395
Air conditioning, fluid - volume and grade Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and lubricants in the air conditioning system can be read in the tables below.
A/C decal
The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.
Refrigerant
Weight Prescribed grade
625 g R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pres- surised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Compressor oil
Volume Prescribed grade
60 ml PAG oil
Related information Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 348)
11 Specifications
11
396
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams CO2 per km.
Explanation
gram CO2/km
litre/100 km
urban driving
extra-urban driving
combined driving
manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
NOTE
If the consumption and emission data is missing then it is included in the enclosed supplement.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
V40
T2A (B4204T38) 167 7.3 104 4.5 127 5.5
T2B (B4204T38) 170 7.4 99 4.3 125 5.4
T2A (B4154T5) 170 7.3 106 4.5 129 5.5
T2B (B4154T5) 168 7.2 101 4.4 125 5.4
T3 (B4204T37) 167 7.3 104 4.5 127 5.5
11 Specifications
11
}} 397
V40
T3 (B4154T4) 170 7.3 106 4.5 129 5.5
T4 (B4204T19) 167 7.3 104 4.5 127 5.5
T4 (B4204T19) 165 7.2 107 4.6 128 5.5
T5 (B4204T11) 185 7.9 110 4.8 137 5.9
D2A (D4204T8) 107 4.1 87 3.3 94 3.6
D2B (D4204T8) 104 4.1 84 3,2 91 3.5
D2C (D4204T8) 93 3.7 76 2,9 82 3,2
D2A (D4204T8) 116 4.4 93 3.5 101 3.8
D2B (D4204T8) 110 4.3 90 3.4 97 3.7
D3A (D4204T9) 114 4.4 91 3.5 99 3.8
D3B (D4204T9) 111 4.2 86 3.3 95 3.6
D3A (D4204T9) 117 4.6 97 3.7 104 4.0
|| 11 Specifications
11
398
V40
D3B (D4204T9) 116 4.5 93 3.6 101 3.9
D4A (D4204T14) 110 4.2 93 3.6 99 3.8
D4B (D4204T14) 108 4.1 89 3.5 96 3.7
D4A (D4204T14) 132 5.0 96 3.7 109 4.2
D4B (D4204T14) 129 4.9 93 3.5 106 4.0
A Does not apply to the low-emission variant. B This only applies to the low-emissions variant. C Only applies for the low-emissions 82 grams CO2/km variant. Certain markets.
Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles3, that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and carbon dioxide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table's val- ues. Examples of this are:
The driver's driving style.
If the customer has specified wheels larger than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version, then rolling resis- tance increases.
High speed results in increased wind resistance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to3.
3 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h (0-75 mph). The driving is simulated. - Cars with manual gearbox are started in 2nd gear (applies to cars with up to 18-inch wheels). The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accord- ance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
11 Specifications
11
399
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles3 which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based.
Consumption is higher and power output lower for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- nation with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
Related information Economical driving (p. 304)
Fuel - petrol (p. 300)
Fuel - diesel (p. 301)
Weights (p. 383)
3 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h (0-75 mph). The driving is simulated. - Cars with manual gearbox are started in 2nd gear (applies to cars with up to 18-inch wheels). The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accord- ance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
11 Specifications
11
400
Tyres - approved tyre pressures Approved tyre pressures for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.
V40
Engine
Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA
Front
(kPa)B Rear
(kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
All engines
205/55 R16
205/50 R17
225/45 R17
0 - 160C 230 230 260 260 260 (280D)
160+E 250 250 300 280 -
225/40 R18
235/35 R19
0 - 160C 230 230 260 260 260
160+E 270 270 320 300 -
Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80F 420 420 420 420 -
A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. C 0 - 100 mph D Only applies to 16" wheels for D2/D4 manual, low emission variant (85 gram/km CO2). E 100+ mph F max 50 mph
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.
Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 319)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 318)
Type designations (p. 380)
11 Specifications
11
401
12 Alphabetical Index
12
402
A
ACC Adaptive cruise control................. 200
Active main beam...................................... 90
Active Park Assist.................................... 250 function............................................... 251 Limitations.......................................... 253 operation............................................. 251 Symbols and messages..................... 254
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 92
Active Yaw Control.................................. 185
Adaptation of headlamp beam.................. 98
Adapting driving characteristics.............. 260
Adaptive Cruise Control........................... 200 change cruise control functionality..... 209 deactivate........................................... 207 fault tracing......................................... 212 function............................................... 201 managing speed................................. 204 overtaking........................................... 207 overview.............................................. 203 radar sensor........................................ 210 setting the time interval...................... 205 standby mode..................................... 206 temporary deactivation....................... 206
Additional heater electric........................................ 143, 144 fuel-driven........................................... 143
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 85
Airbag activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 36 driver's side.................................... 34, 42 passenger side......................... 34, 36, 42
AIRBAG ..................................................... 34
Airbag system............................................ 33 warning symbol.................................... 32
Air cleaning material............................................... 127 passenger compartment.... 125, 126, 127
Air conditioning........................................ 134
Air conditioning, fluid volume and grade............................... 395
Air conditioning system repair................................................... 348
Air distribution.......................................... 128 Recirculation....................................... 136 table.................................................... 137
Air quality system IAQS........................... 127
Alarm........................................ 180, 181, 182 alarm indicator.................................... 181 alarm signals....................................... 182 automatic activation........................... 181 automatic re-arming........................... 181 checking the alarm............................. 164 reduced alarm level............................ 182 remote control key not working.......... 182
Alcohol lock............................................. 265
Allergy and asthma inducing sub- stances.................................................... 126
Approach lighting.............................. 97, 162
Automatic car washes............................. 372
Automatic gearbox.......................... 274, 278 manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 274 towing and recovery........................... 312 trailer................................................... 306
Automatic relocking................................. 173
B
Backrest..................................................... 81 front seat, lowering............................... 81 rear seat, folding................................... 84
Bag holder .............................................. 153 folding................................................. 153
Battery............................................. 297, 358 jump starting....................................... 271 maintenance....................................... 358 overload.............................................. 297 remote control key/PCC..................... 167 start..................................................... 358 support............................................... 361 symbols on the battery....................... 360 warning symbols................................. 360
12 Alphabetical Index
12
403
BLIS................................................. 255, 256
Bonnet, opening...................................... 342
Book service and repair........................... 337
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 347
Brake fluid grade and volume............................... 393
Brake light.................................................. 93
Brakes.............................................. 292, 294 Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 293 brake light............................................. 93 brake system...................... 292, 293, 294 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 294 filling brake fluid.................................. 347 handbrake........................................... 294 symbols in the combined instrument panel................................................... 293
bulbs, specifications................................ 354
C
Camera sensor................................ 220, 231
Car care................................................... 372 Leather upholstery.............................. 376
Cargo area cargo net............................................. 155 lighting.................................................. 96 loading................................................ 151
mounting points.................................. 153 parcel shelf......................................... 156
Car key memory...................................... 159
Car upholstery......................................... 375
Car washing............................................. 372
Catalytic converter................................... 302 Recovery............................................. 313
Changing wheels..................................... 323
Checking the engine oil level................... 344
Children child safety locks.................................. 47 child seat and airbag............................ 52 child seats and side airbags................. 39 location in car....................................... 52 safety.............................................. 39, 47
Child safety locks............................ 178, 179
Child seats................................................. 47 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats... 53 recommended...................................... 48 size classes for child seats with ISO- FIX fixture system................................. 53 types..................................................... 54 upper mounting points for child seats.. 56
City Safety............................................ 218
Cleaning automatic car wash............................ 372 car washing........................................ 372
rims..................................................... 373 seatbelts............................................. 376 upholstery........................................... 375
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 126
Climate control actual temperature............................. 125 auto-regulation................................... 133 general................................................ 124 personal preferences.......................... 127 sensors............................................... 125 temperature control............................ 134
Clock, adjustment...................................... 74
CO2 emissions......................................... 396
Collision..................................................... 43
Collision warning............................. 225, 226
Collision warning system function............................................... 226 general limitations............................... 230 operation............................................. 229 Pedestrian detection........................... 228 Radar sensor.............................. 210, 218
Collision Warning System with Auto Brake....................................................... 225
Colour code, paint................................... 377
Combined instrument panel................ 64, 65
Compass................................................. 108 calibration........................................... 108
12 Alphabetical Index
12
404
Condensation in headlamps.................... 372
Controls lighting......................................... 88
Control symbols................................... 65, 67
Coolant volume and grade............................... 391
Coolant, checking and filling................... 346
Cooling system........................................ 296 overheating......................................... 296
Corner Traction Control........................... 185
Crash, see Collision................................... 43
Cruise control.......................................... 195 deactivate........................................... 199 managing speed................................. 196 resume set speed............................... 198 temporary deactivation....................... 197
CTA.......................................................... 257
Cyclist detection...................................... 227
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 126
D
Daytime running lights............................... 89
Deadlock.................................................. 177 deactivation........................................ 177 temporary deactivation....................... 177
Defroster.................................................. 135
Detachable towbar storage................................................ 307
Diesel....................................................... 301 run out of fuel..................................... 301
Diesel particle filter.................................. 303
Dimensions.............................................. 382
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 345
Direction indicator..................................... 94
Direction indicators.................................... 94
direction of rotation................................. 317
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 280
Display lighting.......................................... 88
Distance Warning.................................... 215 Limitations.......................................... 216 Symbols and messages..................... 217
Door mirrors............................................. 105 resetting.............................................. 105
Drive mode ECO...................................... 290
Driver Alert Control.................................. 234 operation............................................. 235
Driver Alert System.................................. 234
Driving...................................................... 297 cooling system.................................... 296 with a tailer......................................... 305 with the tailgate open......................... 297
Driving in water........................................ 295
Driving with a trailer towball load........................................ 384 towing capacity.................................. 384
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 130
Eco Cruise............................................... 290
EcoGuide................................................... 68
Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual........... 26
ECO mode............................................... 290
Economical driving.................................. 304
ECO pressure.................................. 318, 400
Electrical socket...................................... 150 cargo area........................................... 154
Electrical system...................................... 363
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 130
Electronic temperature control - ETC...... 131
Emergency equipment first aid kit........................................... 328 warning triangle.................................. 327
Emergency puncture repair..................... 330 action.................................................. 332 inflating the tyres................................ 335 rechecking.......................................... 334
12 Alphabetical Index
12
405
Emergency puncture repair kit location............................................... 330 overview.............................................. 331 sealing fluid......................................... 331
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 396
Engine deactivate........................................... 270 overheating......................................... 296 start..................................................... 269 Start/Stop........................................... 281
Engine and passenger compartment heater messages........................................... 142 timer.................................................... 141
Engine block heater................................. 139
Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater
direct start.......................................... 140 immediate stop................................... 141
Engine compartment Brake and clutch fluid......................... 347 Check................................................. 343 coolant................................................ 346 Engine oil............................................ 343 overview.............................................. 342
Engine drag control................................. 185
Engine oil......................................... 343, 388 adverse driving conditions.................. 388
filter..................................................... 343 grade and volume............................... 389
Engine oil, filling....................................... 344
Engine specifications............................... 386
Error messages Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 213 Driver Alert Control............................. 236 LKA..................................................... 241 see Messages and symbols............... 213
Error messages in BLIS........................... 259
ETC, electronic temperature control........ 131
External dimensions................................ 382
F
Fan ECC.................................................... 133 ETC..................................................... 133
Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 221
First aid.................................................... 328
First aid kit............................................... 328
Fluids, capacities...... 357, 391, 392, 393, 394, 395
Fluids and oils.................. 391, 392, 393, 395
Fog lamp rear........................................................ 93
Foot brake............................... 292, 293, 294
Front bulbs location............................................... 349
Front seat head restraint........................................ 81
FSC, ecolabelling....................................... 26
Fuel.................................................. 300, 301 fuel consumption................................ 396 fuel economy...................................... 318 fuel filter.............................................. 302
Fuel-driven heater timer.................................................... 141
Fuelling............................................ 177, 303 filling................................................... 299 filling with reserve fuel can................. 303 fuel filler flap....................................... 298 fuel filler flap, locking.......................... 177 fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 299
Fuel tank volume................................................ 394
Fuse box.................................................. 363
Fuses changing............................................. 363 General............................................... 363 in engine compartment....................... 364 under glovebox................................... 367 under the right-hand front seat........... 370
12 Alphabetical Index
12
406
G
Gearbox................................................... 272 automatic.................................... 274, 278 manual................................................ 272
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 280
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- gagement................................................. 280
Gear shift indicator.................................. 273
Geartronic................................................ 274
Glass laminated/reinforced............................. 26
Glass roof, power operated roller blind... 107
Glovebox................................................. 149 locking................................................ 175
Gross vehicle weight............................... 383
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 273
H
Handbrake............................................... 294
Hazard warning flashers............................ 94
Headlamp beam adaptation............................................. 98 height adjustment................................. 88
Headlamp control...................................... 86
Headlamp levelling of headlamps.............. 88
Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 98
Headlamp pattern adjustment................... 98
Headlamps............................................... 349
head restraint centre seat, rear.................................... 83 front seat............................................... 81 lowering................................................ 84
Heating rearview and door mirrors.................. 106 rear window........................................ 106 seats................................................... 132 windscreen......................................... 106
Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 21
High engine temperature......................... 296
High-pressure headlamp washing........... 102
Hill Start Assist........................................ 281
Home safe light duration........................... 96
Horn........................................................... 86
I
IAQS - Interior Air Quality System........... 127
Immobiliser.............................................. 161
Indicator symbols...................................... 69
Inflatable curtain.................................. 39, 42
Information button, PCC.......................... 164
Information display.............................. 64, 65
Inlaid mats............................................... 149
Instrument lighting..................................... 88
Instrument overview left-hand drive car................................ 58 right-hand drive car.............................. 61
Instruments and controls..................... 58, 61
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) Air cleaning......................................... 127
Interior lighting........................................... 95
Interior rearview mirror............................. 107 automatic dimming............................. 107
Intermittent wiping................................... 101
Internet-connected car book service and repair...................... 337
J
Jack......................................................... 327
Journey statistics..................................... 122
Jump starting........................................... 271
12 Alphabetical Index
12
407
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 383
Key................................................... 158, 160
Key blade......................................... 165, 166
Keyless drive.... 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 270
Keyless - locking..................................... 170
Keyless start (keyless drive)..... 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 270
Keyless - unlocking................................. 170
Keypad in the steering wheel.................... 86
Key positions............................................. 79
L
Labels...................................................... 380
Laminated glass......................................... 26
Lamps...................................................... 348
Lane assistance operation............................................. 239
Lane Keeping Aid - LKA.......................... 237
Laser sensor............................................ 222
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 376
Lifting tool................................................ 327
Light indications, PCC............................. 164
Lighting Active Xenon headlamps...................... 92 approach lighting.......................... 97, 162 automatic lighting, passenger com- partment............................................... 96 Automatic main beam........................... 90 bulbs, specifications........................... 354 controls........................................... 86, 95 controls lighting.................................... 88 daytime running lights.......................... 89 display lighting...................................... 88 headlamp levelling................................ 88 home safe lighting................................ 96 instrument lighting................................ 88 in the passenger compartment............. 95 main/dipped beam............................... 90 position lamps...................................... 88 rear fog lamp........................................ 93 tunnel detection.................................... 89
Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 348 daytime running lights........................ 352 dipped beam (cars with halogen head- lamps)................................................. 350 direction indicators, front.................... 351 front position lamp.............................. 352 main beam (cars with active xenon headlamps)......................................... 351 main beam (cars with halogen head- lamps)................................................. 351
rear bulb holder: direction indicators, brake lamps and reversing lamps...... 353 rear fog lamp...................................... 353 vanity mirror........................................ 354
LKA - Lane Keeping Aid.......................... 237
Loading cargo area................................... 151, 153 General....................................... 151, 153 long load............................................. 152 mounting points.................................. 153 roof load............................................. 152
Lock locking................................................ 172 manual locking.................................... 173 unlocking.................................... 172, 174
Lockable wheel bolts............................... 321
Lock confirmation ................................... 160
Lock indicator.......................................... 160
Locking/unlocking inside.................................................. 174 tailgate................................................ 175
M
Main/dipped beam.................................... 90
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 90
12 Alphabetical Index
12
408
maintenance Rustproofing....................................... 375
Manual gearbox....................................... 272 GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 273 Towing and recovery.......................... 312 trailer................................................... 306
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 274
Max. roof load.......................................... 383
Memory function in seat............................ 82
Menus Combined instrument panel............... 109 menu overview, analogue................... 110 menu overview, digital........................ 110
Messages................................................ 111
Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 213 Collision Warning with Auto Brake.......................................... 224, 233 Driver Alert Control............................. 236 Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater........................... 142 LKA..................................................... 241
Messages in BLIS.................................... 259
Messages in the information display....... 110
Meters fuel gauge....................................... 64, 65 speedometer................................... 64, 65 tachometer..................................... 64, 65
misting attending to the windows................... 124
Misting condensation in headlamps............... 372
Mood lighting............................................. 96
MY CAR................................................... 112
O
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 388, 389
Oil level low.............................................. 344
Output...................................................... 386
outside temperature gauge....................... 73
Overheating..................................... 296, 305
Owner's manual, ecolabelling.................... 26
P
PACOS....................................................... 36
Paintwork colour code......................................... 377 damage and touch-up........................ 377
Panic function.......................................... 162
PAP - Active Park Assist.......................... 250
Parcel shelf.............................................. 156
Park Assist............................................... 242 backward............................................ 244 fault indicator...................................... 245 function............................................... 242 parking assistance sensors................ 245
Park assist camera.................................. 246 settings............................................... 248
Parking brake........................................... 294
Passenger compartment filter................. 126
Passenger compartment heater.............. 139
Passenger compartment lighting automatic.............................................. 96
PCC Personal Car Communicator functions............................................. 162 range................................................... 165
Pedestrian airbag....................................... 45 folding up.............................................. 46 moving the car...................................... 46
Pedestrian detection................................ 225
Personal Car Communicator................... 165
Petrol grade............................................. 300
Pocket park assist - PAP......................... 250
Polishing.................................................. 373
Position lamp............................................. 88
Power guide............................................... 68
12 Alphabetical Index
12
409
Power operated roller blind for glass roof.......................................................... 107
Power seat................................................. 82
Powershift gearbox.......................... 278, 312
Power windows....................................... 103 resetting.............................................. 104
Puncture.................................................. 330
Q
Queue Assist............................................ 207
Queue assistance.................................... 207
R
Radar sensor........................................... 201 Limitations.......................................... 210
Rain sensor.............................................. 101
Raising the car......................................... 340
Rear bulbs location............................................... 352
Rear seat Heating............................................... 132
Rearview and door mirrors compass............................................. 108 door.................................................... 105
electrically retractable......................... 105 heating................................................ 106 interior................................................. 107
Rear window heating................................................ 106
Recommendations during driving............ 297
Recommended child seats table...................................................... 48
Recovery.................................................. 314
Refrigerant............................................... 348
Regeneration........................................... 303
Remote control immobiliser..................... 161
Remote control key................. 158, 159, 160 battery replacement............................ 167 detachable key blade................. 165, 166 functions............................................. 162 loss..................................................... 158 range........................................... 163, 168
Remote control key system, type appro- val............................................................ 183
Remote control key with PCC range................................................... 165
Resetting, trip meter........................ 116, 120
Resetting the door mirrors....................... 105
Resetting the power windows................. 104
Retractable power door mirrors............... 105
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 273
Road sign information............................. 189 Limitations.......................................... 191 operation............................................. 189
Roof load, max. weight............................ 383
Rustproofing............................................ 375
S
Safety lock children................................................. 47
Safety mode.............................................. 43 moving the car...................................... 45 start attempt......................................... 44
Sealing fluid............................................. 331
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 81
Seatbelt...................................................... 28 loosen................................................... 30 pregnancy............................................. 30 putting on............................................. 29 rear seat................................................ 31 seatbelt reminder.................................. 31 seatbelt tensioner................................. 31
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 31
Seatbelt tensioner................................ 31, 42
Seats.......................................................... 81 head restraints, rear.............................. 83
12 Alphabetical Index
12
410
heating................................................ 132 Heating............................................... 132 lowering the front backrest................... 81 lowering the rear backrest.................... 84 power.................................................... 82
Securing loads (Loading)......................... 153
Sensus....................................................... 78
Service position....................................... 355
Service programme................................. 337
Set time interval....................................... 215
Side airbag SIPS.................................. 38, 42
SIPS airbag................................................ 38
Skidding................................................... 298
slippery driving conditions....................... 298
Soot filter................................................. 303
SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 303
spare wheel..................................... 322, 323 installation........................................... 325 taking out............................................ 323
Speed limiter............................................ 191 alarm for speed exceeded.................. 194 deactivation........................................ 195 getting started............................ 192, 193 temporary deactivation....................... 193
Speed ratings, tyres................................. 320
Spin control............................................. 185
Stability and traction control system....... 185
Stability system....................................... 185
Stains....................................................... 375
Start/Stop................................................ 281 function and operation....................... 282 the engine does not stop.................... 283
Starter battery changing............................................. 360
Steering force, speed related.................. 260
Steering force level, see Steering force... 260
Steering lock............................................ 271
Steering wheel........................................... 85 keypad.................................................. 86 steering wheel adjustment.................... 85
Stone chips and scratches...................... 377
Storage spaces driver's side........................................ 148 glovebox............................................. 149 tunnel console.................................... 148
Storage spaces in the passenger com- partment.................................................. 146
Support battery........................................ 361
Switching off the engine.......................... 270
Symbols indicator symbols..................... 65, 67, 69 warning symbols............................. 65, 67
Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 213 Collision Warning with Auto Brake.......................................... 224, 233 Driver Alert Control............................. 236 LKA..................................................... 241
System tripping.................................................. 42
T
Tailgate Locking/unlocking.............................. 175
Temperature actual temperature............................. 125
Temperature control................................ 134
Total airing function......................... 124, 175
Towbar detachable, attachment...................... 308 detachable, removal........................... 310
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 307
Towbar - detachable attachment/removal.................... 308, 310
Towing..................................................... 312 towing eye.......................................... 313
Towing bracket........................................ 307 specifications...................................... 308
12 Alphabetical Index
12
411
Towing capacity and towball load........... 384
Towing eye.............................................. 313
Traction control........................................ 185
Trailer....................................................... 305 cable................................................... 305 driving with a trailer............................ 305 snaking............................................... 311
Trailer stability assist............................... 185
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 311
Transmission............................................ 272
Transmission oil volume and grade............................... 392
Transponder.............................................. 21
Tread depth............................................. 321
Tread wear indicators.............................. 318
Trip computer.......................... 113, 119, 122 analogue instrument panel................. 115
Trip meter.................................................. 74
Trip meter, resetting........................ 116, 120
Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 212
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 185, 311
Tunnel console........................................ 148 12 V socket......................................... 150 armrest................................................ 148 cigarette lighter and ashtray............... 149
Tunnel detection........................................ 89
Type approval radar system....................................... 261 remote control key system................. 183
Type designations................................... 380
Tyre dimension........................................ 319
Tyre load index........................................ 320
Tyre monitoring........................................ 328
Tyre pressure label.................................. 318
Tyre pressure monitoring......................... 328
Tyres direction of rotation............................ 317 maintenance....................................... 316 pressure...................................... 318, 400 puncture repair................................... 330 specifications...................................... 400 tread depth......................................... 321 tread wear indicators.......................... 318 tyre pressure monitoring..................... 328 winter tyres......................................... 321
U
Unlocking from the inside.................................... 174 from the outside................................. 172
Unlocking with the key blade................... 171
V
Vanity mirror............................................ 150 lighting.................................................. 96
Ventilation................................................ 128
Vibration damper..................................... 307
Volvo ID..................................................... 22
Volvo Sensus............................................. 78
W
Warning lamp Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 201 collision warning system.................... 229 stability and traction control system.. 185
Warning lamps Airbags SRS....................................... 71 alternator not charging......................... 71 Fault in brake system........................... 71 Low oil pressure................................... 71 Parking brake applied........................... 71 seatbelt reminder............................ 31, 71 Warning................................................ 71
Warning sound collision warning system.................... 229
Warning symbols........................... 65, 67, 71
Warning triangle....................................... 327
12 Alphabetical Index
12
412
Washer fluid............................................. 357
Washers rear window........................................ 102 washer fluid, filling.............................. 357 windscreen......................................... 102
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 374
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 374
Waxing..................................................... 373
Weights kerb weight......................................... 383
Wheel bolts.............................................. 321 lockable.............................................. 321
Wheel change.......................................... 323
Wheel rim, dimensions............................ 319
Wheel rims cleaning.............................................. 373
Wheels removal............................................... 323 snow chains........................................ 321 spare wheel........................................ 322
Wheels and tyres..................................... 322
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 40
WHIPS child seat/booster cushion................... 41 seating position.................................... 41 whiplash protection........................ 40, 42
Windows, rearview and door mirrors....... 374
Windscreen heating........................................ 106, 135
Windscreen washing................................ 102
Windscreen wiper.................................... 101 rain sensor.......................................... 101
Winter driving........................................... 298
Winter tyres.............................................. 321
Wiper blades............................................ 355 changing............................................. 356 Cleaning.............................................. 357 replacing, rear window....................... 357 Service position.................................. 355
Wiper
Related manuals for Volvo V40 2016 Owners Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the V40 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo V40 2016 Owners Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo V40 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo V40. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Volvo V40 2016 Owners Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Volvo V40 2016 Owners Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Volvo V40 2016 Owners Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Volvo V40 2016 Owners Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo V40 2016 Owners Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.